Home

PowerFlex DC User Manual Part 1 - Mid

1. Q M SN ON O eo O O bl O Off O O EE OFF 23000 ES O a E o En O E ANN 0FF OL oe JSF CI E Sel ec I pr s 10 20 D 0000 ooo oooo0o00000 pprecoobocon 0000 OODOOOOODO e AOUT S4 I3E O ON l Senk sti En o HE sa SOME O cap O aa O munussvssy pessssvssn oo Q000000000jJ0000000000 _ ABC Es ENO12 At A B B 2 Z COM V 12345678 910 IIiit 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 Q0000 QO0OOOOOOO o000000000 0000000000 Installation and Wiring 1 29 Table 1 M Control Circuit Board Jumper and DIP Switch Settings Jumper Factory ID Switch Function Default 0 So For factory boot flashing only Leave set to the factory setting Jumper Off JumperOn Firmware boot Jumper Off Normal
2. Explanation Position 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 a b c d e f g h i j k a fi g Drive 230V 60 Hz Input Field Supply Code Type Code Hp re Frame mo Code Type 20P PowerFlex DC eS APS A Three Phase Regulated 7P0 1 5 7 A 10 E Fixed Field w Economy 9P0 2 9 A 10 R Single Phase Regulated b 012 3 12 A 10 Motor Operation 020 5 20 A 10 Code Type 029 75 29 A 10 h 2 Two Quadrant Operation 038 10 38 A 10 Packaging Documentation 4 Four Quadrant Operation 055 15 55 A 10 Code Shipping Carton User Manual 073 20 73 A 14 0 No No 093 25 93 A 14 A Yes Yes C 110 30 110 A 14 N Yes No Input Type 146 40 146 B 20 Q No Yes Code Type 180 50 180 B 20 1 6 Pulse 218 60 218 B 20 2 12 Pulse 265 75 265 B 20 360 100 360 B 20 HIM 434 125 434 B 20 Code Operator Interface d 521 150 521 20 0 Blank Cover Standard for additional selections refer to the Enclosure PowerFlex Digital DC Drive Technical Data A Conform publication 20P TD001 Code Enclosure Rating Coat f2 A IP20 NEMA UL Type Open No 460V 60 Hz Input IP43 NEMA UL Type 1 No Code Hp Armature erame Field J l Filter Amps Amps 1 0 Options G IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 No 4P1 2 4 1 A 10 Code Control H IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 No 6P0 3 6 A 10 1 0 Expansion Card 4 Additional 24V Fan Filter 010 5 10 A 10 A dc Digital Inputs amp Outputs 2 Analog N I
3. No Parameter Name Group Page No Parameter Name Group Page 1205 Diam Inc Dec En Diameter Calc 3 41 1276 Inversion In 1 Digital Inputs 3 66 1206 Diam init filter Diameter Calc 3 41 1277 Inversion In 2 Digital Inputs 3 66 1207 Diam stdy delay Diameter Calc 41 1278 Inversion In 3 Digital Inputs 3 66 1208 Close Loop Comp Winder Functions 3 43 1279 Inversion In 4 Digital Inputs 3 66 1209 Torque Winder En Winder Functions 3 43 1280 Inversion In 5 Digital Inputs 3 66 1210 W Target Winder Functions 4 1281 Inversion In 6 Digital Inputs 3 66 1212 Acc Dec Filter Ramp Rates 3 29 1282 Inversion In 7 Digital Inputs 3 66 1213 Actual Comp Winder Functions 3 43 1283 Inversion In 8 Digital Inputs 3 66 1214 Closed Loop En Winder Functions 4 1284 Ref Spd Source Winder Functions 44 1215 Speed Demand En Winder Functions 3 43 1285 Ref Speed Gain Winder Functions 3 44 1216 Spd match torque Winder Functions 3 43 1286 Ref Line Speed Winder Functions 3 44 1217 W Reference Winder Functions 44 1287 Static F Zero Winder Functions 44 1218 Scale3 Input Scale Blocks 3 38 1319 Data In Val Sel Datalinks 3 59 1219 Scale3 Output Scale Blocks 3 38 1320 Data In SelData Datalinks 3 59 1220 Scale3 Mul Scale Blocks 3 1321 DPI Fdbk Select Comm Control 3 57 1221 Scale3 Div Scale Blocks 3 38 1322 Directio
4. Programming and Parameters 3 75 Name No Group Page Name No Group Page Speed Reg En 242 Speed Regulator 3 26 UserDefined10 513 User Defined 3 54 Speed Reg In 118 Speed Meters 3 11 UserDefined11 514 User Defined 3 54 Speed Reg In Pct 117 Speed Meters 3 11 UserDefined12 515 User Defined 3 54 Speed Thresh Neg 102 Speed Regulator 3 24 UserDefined13 516 User Defined 3 54 Speed Thresh Pos 101 Speed Regulator 3 24 UserDefined14 517 User Defined 3 54 Speed Threshold 393 Diagnostics 48 UserDefined15 518 User Defined 3 54 Speed Tune Dir 1029 Autotune 3 21 UserDefined2 505 User Defined 3 54 Speed Tune Ki 1033 Autotune 3 21 UserDefined3 506 User Defined 3 54 Speed Tune Kp 1032 Autotune 3 21 UserDefined4 507 User Defined 54 Speed Up Base 446 Speed Regulator 3 27 UserDefined5 508 User Defined 3 54 Speed Up Filter 447 Speed Regulator 3 27 UserDefined6 509 User Defined 3 54 Speed Zero Delay 108 Speed Regulator 3 2 UserDefined7 510 User Defined 3 54 Speed Zero Level 107 Speed Regulator 3 25 UserDefined8 511 User Defined 3 54 Spd Zero P Gain 126 Speed Regulator 3 26 UserDefined9 512 User Defined 3 54 Start At Powerup 1344 Restart Modes 3 31 UsrDefBitWrdA 519 User Defined 3 54 Start Inhibits 1403 Diagnostics 3 51 UsrDefBitWrdAO 520 User Defined 3 55 Start Mask 592 Masks 8 Owners 3 57 UsrDefBitWrdA1 521 User Defined 3 55 Star
5. I O Wiring Examples Required Parameter Input Output Connection Example Changes Potentiometer Unipolar gt e Adjust Scaling Speed Reference i 72 Anlg Int Scale and 10k Ohm Pot Recommended ETI 3 73 Anlg1 Tune Scale 2k Ohm Minimum 4 e View Signal Value 5 1404 Analog In1 Value 6 e View Signal Output h 7 385 Speed Ref Out 8 9 IT 110 Joystick Bipolar Speed 7 Set Direction Mode Reference l at z 5 1322 Direction Mode HOV Input i 3 1 Bipolar El e Adjust Scaling Y 1 5 72 Anlg Int Scale and ET 6 73 Anlg1 Tune Scale 7 e View Signal Value 8 1404 Analog In1 Value 9 e View Signal Output EJ 385 Speed Ref Out Installation and Wiring Required Parameter Input Output Connection Example Changes Analog Input Bipolar Speed e Set Direction Mode Reference 1 T 1 1322 Direction Mode HOV Input gommen 1 Bipolar j i e Adjust Scaling 5 72 Anlg Int Scale and le 73 Anlg1 Tune Scale ET 7 e View Signal Value ET 8 1404 Analog In1 Value 9 e View Signal Output EJ 10 385 Speed Ref Out Analog Input Unipo
6. Controls which adapters can select the acceleration ramp rates Pars 660 Accel Time 1 and 24 Accel Time 2 of the drive Fault Clr Mask Controls which adapters can clear a fault MOP Mask Controls which adapters can issue MOP commands to the drive See Logic Mask See Logic Mask 3 57 Le Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 589 DPI Baud Rate Default Read Only Shows the data transfer rate for attached drive peripherals Min Max 1 1 1 500 kbps 590 DPI Port Sel Default 1 DPI Port 1 1343 Selects which DPI port reference value unscaled will Options 1 DPI Port 1 appear in Par 1343 DPI Port Value 2 DPI Port 2 3 DPI Port 3 4 DPI Port 4 5 DPI Port 5 1321 DPI Fdbk Select Default 0 Speed Selects the feedback variable and DPI units displayed on the Options 0 Speed feedback line of the HIM 1 Current e 0 Speed Speed feedback units are in RPM e 1 Current Current feedback units are in 1343 DPI Port Value Default Read Only 590 Unscaled value of the DPI reference selected in Par 590 DPI Min Max 32767 Port Sel 591 Logic Mask Determines which ports can control the drive when Par 1377 Write Mask Act bit 15 is set to 1 If the bit for a port is set to 0 the port
7. File Group Parameters Utility Reference Config Direction Mode 1322 Man Ref Preload 210 MOP Select 1375 Save HIM Ref 209 Save MOP Ref 249 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 211 Reset Defaults 258 Diagnostics Drive Status 1 381 Torque Positive 346 Accel Status 1188 Drive Status 2 382 Torque Negative 347 Decel Status 1189 Last Stop Source 1402 MOP Inc Active 396 Fast Stop Status 1190 Start Inhibits 1403 MOP Dec Active 397 TestPoint Sel 1381 Drive Logic Rslt 1328 Spd Select 0 400 TestPoint Data 1382 At Speed 394 Spd Select 1 401 TaskLoad 32 ms 1383 At Zero Speed 395 Spd Select 2 402 TaskLoad 1 ms 1384 CurrLimit Active 349 Ramp Select 0 403 TaskLoad 2 ms 1385 Spd Limit Active 372 Ramp Select 1 404 TaskLoad 8 ms 1386 Speed Threshold 393 Encoder State 651 Faults Clear Fault Que 263 Fault 2 Code 1352 Fault 2 Time 1362 Fault Clear 1347 Fault 3 Code 1353 Fault 3 Time 1363 Fault Clr Mode 1348 Fault 4 Code 1354 Fault 4 Time 1364 Status1 at Fault 1349 Fault 5 Code 1355 Fault 5 Time 1365 Status2 at Fault 1350 Fault 6 Code 1356 Fault 6 Time 1366 Fault Arm Amps 1371 Fault 7 Code 1357 Fault 7 Time 1367 Fault Speed 1372 Fault 8 Code 1358 Fault 8 Time 1368 Fault Field Amps 1373 Fault 9 Code 1359 Fault 9 Time 1369 Fault Voltage 1374 Fault 10 Code 1360 Fault 10 Time 1370 Fault 1 Code 1351 Fault 1 Time 1361 Alarms Drive Alarm 1 1380 OverTemp Fit Cfg 365 UnderVolt Thresh
8. Contactor Selects the type of contactor to be controlled by the drive Either Options 0 None style of contactor AC or DC can be used with or without puons i Co e Dynamic Braking DB contactor 2 C DB The type of control selected determines how many I O points omaciory will be required for contactor control and status e Contactor 1 relay digital output 1 digital input is used e Contactor DB 2 relay digital outputs 1 digital input is used Related Programming and Parameters 3 67 D o Parameter Name amp Description iL See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Digital Out1 Sel Default 5 Ready Digital Out2 Sel Default 9 Fault O Digital Out3 Sel Default 2 Spd Thresh Digital Out4 Sel Default 4 CurrentLimit Digital Out5 Sel Default 26 Alarm Digital Out6 Sel Default 0 NotUsed Digital Out7 Sel Default 0 NotUsed Digital Out8 Sel Default 0 NotUsed ov Selects the source of the value that drives the digital output Refer to Option Definitions on Option Definitions for Digital 2 Outx Sel Relay Out 1 Sel and Relay Out 2 Sel on page 3 68 2 These parameters are used to configure the digital outputs on 5 the I O Expansion circuit board o Options E gt a 0 Not Used 8 Spd Limited 16 Encoder Err 24
9. 0 0 0 cece eee 1 13 Armature Converter Connections 0 0 ccc cece eee raven 1 16 Field Circuit Connections 0 00 ccc ene raven 1 19 Field Current Resistors 0 0 cece cette neces 1 20 Relay Outputs ai pice Are 1 21 Thermistors and Thermal Switches 0 0 0 0 ee eee ee eee 1 21 Control Circuit Input Power 0 0 ec cee ee eee eae 1 24 Frame C Heatsink Cooling Fans and Internal Fuse Signal Terminals 1 26 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 MOVIDO A E A ta cc ae aha ane Reade eae a Sade Mandel 1 27 DIP Switch and Jumper Settings 2 0 0 eens 1 28 VO Signal and Control Wiring 0 0 0 ee cece eens 1 31 VO Wiring Examples 0 0 0 ccc cece eect n ene es 1 33 Digital Encoder Terminal Block 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 1 36 DC Analog Tachometer Terminal Block 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee eee 1 38 Drive Start Up Drive Start Up Checklist geas 0 fsck asset acorn ana errata 2 1 Before Applying Power to the Drive 0 0 0 cee eee eee ee 2 2 Applying Power to the Drive 2 1 occ rr 2 3 Speed Up PUNCUON crac een as garde use eee 2 16 Configuring the Speed Zero Logic 0 0 cece eee eens 2 16 Adaptive Speed Regulation 0 0 0 0 c cece cece eee eens 2 16 Programming and Parameters About Para m trica seg See eee hee 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 00 eee cece ete e nee 3 3 File Group Parameter Order 1 0 0 0 3 3 Numbered List VIE
10. I O Connection Example Encoder Power Internal Drive Power 5 12 15V DC Internal drive 5 12 15V DC 4v on ow 1 pA COM Common l l Z 1 z B 10 to Shiela B A A 0 tae w 1 Ry com E T zon la Y 210 shietd B O External s Jopi gu A At IG Single Ended Dual Channat Y OLA yh ae COM A z OB ZNOT z B B A A 0 ed Differential wv 10 COM 2 Z Z2 B B A 10 A 0 to Shield 1 Shield connection is on drive Control EMI shield Refer to Figure 1 33 on page 1 36 1 38 Installation and Wiring DC Analog Tachometer Terminal Block Figure 1 35 Analog Tachometer Terminal Block Location Uii itii didi get Cee Eye Che WEEN MV AE Chey ERE a i AAC 008208 UUE E E gt Analog Tachometer terminal block Refer to page A 3 for DC Analog Tachometer specifications incorrectly or the tachometer is wired incorrectly Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The Drive can overspeed if DIP switch S4 is set Table 1 W DC Analog Tachometer Terminal Designations No Signal Description Negative input A Not Used B C Positive input 22 7 45 4 90 7 181 6 Clockwise rotation positive 302 9V max voltage Counterclockwise rotation negative 8 mA max current 0 Maximum voltage depends on the confi
11. Not Active 1 Not Active 0 Active 1 Not Active 1 Not Active 0 Active 1 Not Active 10 0 65535 s 10 0 65535 s 1 00 0 10 60 00 s 1 00 0 10 60 00 s 1 00 0 10 60 00 s 1 00 0 10 60 00 s 30 0 5000 ms 3 29 Related 110 111 3 30 File Group Load Limits Stop Modes Programming and Parameters No 696 697 698 699 700 715 627 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Torq Red CurLim The armature current limit defined as a percentage of the value defined in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps when Par 342 Torque Reduction is set to 1 Active Droop Percent Droop function gain is a percentage of the ratio between Par 45 Max Ref Speed and the difference of Par 698 Load Comp Par 41 Current Reg In Therefore when the difference between Par 698 Load Comp and Par 41 Current Reg In 100 and Par 696 Droop Percent 100 the speed reference correction signal is equal to Par 45 Max Ref Speed Droop Filter Droop filter time constant for the Droop function Load Comp The load compensation signal This value is typically equal to the master drive s current The load compensation signal is a percentage of lyn Enable Droop Enables Disables the Droop function e Enabled The Droop function is enabled e Disabled The D
12. Related 162 175 469 97 98 File MOTOR CONTROL Group Field Config No 456 467 468 469 497 498 499 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Fld Weaken Ratio The ratio of Motor Nameplate Base Speed to Par 45 Max Ref Speed when Par 469 Field Mode Sel 1 Field Weaken It is the percentage of maximum application speed when field weakening will begin This value is Motor Base Speed Par 45 Max Ref Speed x 100 If Par 469 Field Mode Sel 0 Base Speed this parameter must be 100 Max Fld Curr Pct Maximum allowable field current The maximum value 100 corresponds to the value set in Par 280 Nom Mtr Fld Amps The value of this field linearly affects the field current unless a flux curve is set in Pars 916 917 and 918 Fld Const xx Pct Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input or output Min Fld Curr Pct Minimum allowable field current The value set in this parameter also influences the threshold at which the Field Current Loss fault occurs The threshold is half of the value of Par 468 Min Fid Curr Pct The value of Par 351 Field Current equals the value of this parameter when Par 499 Field Economy En 1 Enabled and Field Economy becomes active Field Mode Sel Operating mode of the field controller e Base Speed The motor field is regulated with constant current
13. It should only be used when the gain of the speed regulator must go higher than the speed range For instructions on configuring these parameters refer to Adaptive Speed Regulator on page C 14 About Parameters Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters This chapter provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex DC drive parameters The parameters can be programmed viewed edited using a Human Interface Module HIM As an alternative programming can also be performed using DriveExplorer or DriveTools SP software and a personal computer Refer to Appendix B for a brief description of the LCD HIM Refer to Appendix D for drive control block diagrams For information on See page About Parameters 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Monitor File 3 11 Motor Control File 3 14 Speed Command File 3 23 Dynamic Control File 3 28 Applications File 3 33 Utility File 3 45 Communications File 3 57 Input Output File 3 61 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 71 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 3 76 To configure a drive to operate in a specific way certain parameters may need to be changed from the default value Three types of parameters exist e ENUM Parameters ENUM parameters allow a selection from two or more items The LCD HIM will display a text message for each item e Bit Parameters Bit parameters have individual bits associated with features or condi
14. Manual Updates Change Page s Removed erroneous derating information 1 1 A 1 Updated AC Input Voltages tables 1 12 Updated AnalogCfict Alarm description to include parameters 1323 1327 DPI Px Select 4 7 Updated Agency Certification Information A 1 Added notation regarding required installation in a Pollution Degree 2 environment A 1 Updated the Maximum Short Circuit Ratings data A 2 Added footnote regarding coil voltage to DC Loop Contactor table information A 18 Updated block diagrams to correct parameter numbers and names D 2 soc ii Notes Preface Chapter 1 Table of Contents Important User Information 0 eee eee eens 1 2 Manual Updates ccc sites A ake lete soc 1 Overview Who Should Use this Manual aavvvvvvavavararere ees p 1 What is in this Manual o ooooococccooco cece eens p 1 Drive Storage Conditions viii di see Se wR p 1 Drive Nameplate Data nons tainei a eea E ne a ed te ae ae ae p 2 Drive Fram Sizes vu vat bes 8 et a Aaa ee ee da p 2 Reference Materials se suksess heks Sus ete set ek hode eed be need bee deh des p 2 Manual Conventions een es tinen i A Eee AG Hente p 3 General Precautions oesie 0 0 u dera e Eiee E E A nee eee en ees p 3 Catalog Number Explanation vvavavavvvvve rava vanene vara rn vanene rann p 4 Installation and Wiring Mounting Considerations 0 0 0 eect teen nere raven 1 1 Operating Conditions and Temperatures 0
15. Se ects the destination of the reference value from DPI Port 2 DPI P3 Select Se ects the destination of the reference value from DPI Port 3 DPI P4 Select Se ects the destination of the reference value from DPI Port 4 DPI P5 Select Se ects the destination of the reference value from DPI Port 5 Values Default Options Refer to Par 1323 DPI P1 Select Refer to Par 1323 DPI P1 Select Refer to Par 1323 DPI P1 Select Refer to Par 1323 DPI P1 Select 0 XJODOIRAON 0 O Off Off Speed Ref A Speed Ref B Trim Ramp Trim Speed Torque Ref Trim Torque Pos Cur Lim Neg Cur Lim Related Parameter Cross Reference by Name Programming and Parameters 3 71 Name No Group Page Name No Group Page Anlg3 Tune Scale 83 Analog Inputs 3 61 AC Line Freq 588 Drive Data 3 13 Arm Current 200 Current Meters 3 12 AC Line Voltage 466 Drive Data 3 1 Arm Current Pct 199 Current Meters 3 12 Acc Dec Filter 1212 Ramp Rates 3 29 Arm Inductance 454 Autotune 3 20 Accel Mask 596 Masks 8 Owners 3 57 Arm Resistance 453 Autotune 3 20 Accel Owner 605 Masks amp Owners 58 Arm Volt Ki 4
16. 2 0 0 0 eee tenes B 5 PCD HIM varer Sete ae rae Soe KS ENE SE SETE EER B 5 Removing Installing the HIM 0 0 eee eee eee ne eens B 5 Application Notes Analog Input Configuration 0 0 0 eee cece ee eee nee rann C 1 Example etwas ii a fedrene di A oa 8 C 1 Example liada E eek a hett Rew eed C 2 Analog Input Signal Comparison 0 0 cece ee eee nes C 2 Current Sp ed Curve wi oe ee sak seks BU ee he ees Se bee eee hie ees C 4 Droop Compensation avvvvvnvava varene vara re neve varaner ane nen aa C 5 PID Punetion s spa rie He GE 8 tba aged besa eae ace bea aden C 5 Configure a Line Speed Signal 2 0 0 cece eee eee C 6 Configure the Feedback Signal in the Follower Drive s 005 C 7 Configure the Tension Set Point Signal in the Follower Drive s C 9 Reference Control umd lr bal wees Wien on eee ag C 10 Auto Speed Sourc s svaner nere verner a C 10 Manual Speed SourceS si erener eee vene varaner eee eens C 10 Changing Speed Sources 1 0 0 0 cece ccc ee eect ee C 10 Torque Referenc Source satt skarpe ewan td ed C 11 Auto Manual Examples evvvvvvvvvvvva var r rea ne ee C 11 Speed Feedback ua r es per eget eres as ee C 12 Scale BlOCks suse Arper bile fratas aa kn C 13 Linking Parameters Via the Scale Block Parameters 00000 C 14 Speed Regulation Functions 0 e eens C 14 Adaptive Speed Regulator 0 0 0 0
17. A DANGER SISK AREE REIP Sa DI BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT 22292204 D1 C1 U1 V1 Table 1 G Field Circuit Wire Sizes Drive Current Rating Codel Tightening Torque Frame 230V Terminals AWG kcmils N m Ibs in Al JAI JAI UnviGiDi 24 10 05 08 44 71 1 Refer to Catalog Number Explanation on page Preface 4 positions 8 10 for corresponding drive HP rating armature amp rating and field amp rating Field Current Resistors The drive s control circuit board is factory set to the minimum field current rating based on the drive size The setting of DIP switch S14 must be changed to be gt the rated field current specified on the motor nameplate or possible motor damage may result In addition the value selected with switch S14 must be entered in parameter 374 Drv Fld Brdg Cur in the control software when the drive is commissioned refer to Drive Start Up on page 2 1 ATTENTION DIP switch S14 must be set to be gt the rated A field current specified on the motor nameplate or possible motor damage may result Compare the field current value of the motor to the rated value of the internal field converter of the drive see Table 1 H below and set switch S14 to the closest value Installation and Wiring 1 21 Note The configuration of switch S14 is not required if the motor s field control is provided via an external source however in this case it is recommended that the switch setti
18. Diameter Reached Indication that the diameter threshold set in Par 1158 Diam Threshold has been exceeded e 0 The diameter threshold has not been exceeded e 1 The diameter threshold has been exceeded Line Speed Pct Line speed Diam Calc Dis Enables Disables the diameter calculation see also Par 1155 Line Spd Thresh The last calculated diameter value is saved if this parameter is changed to 0 Off while the diameter is being calculated Diameter Filter Diameter calculation filter Base Omega Winder speed at the maximum line speed and minimum diameter of the winder unwinder motor shaft side Diam Preset 0 First preset starting diameter The value of this parameter must be set between the value of Pars 799 Minimum Diameter and 1153 Max Diameter Diam Preset 1 Second preset starting diameter The value of this parameter must be set between the value of Pars 799 Minimum Diameter and 1153 Max Diameter Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 1 00 0 00 32 00 m Read Only 0 00 32 00 m 5 00 0 00 150 00 0 0 32767 0
19. Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 gt Related 2 20 Programming and Parameters 3 47 3 o Parameter Name amp Description ic 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 381 Drive Status 1 Read Only Present operating condition of the drive Bit 0 Ready When set 1 the drive is ready Bit 1 Active When set the drive is active Bit 2 Command Dir The direction of commanded rotation 0 Reverse 1 Forward Bit 3 Actual Dir The actual direction of the motor 0 Reverse 1 Forward Bit 4 Accelerating When set the drive is accelerating Bit 5 Decelerating When set the drive is decelerating Bit 6 Alarm When set the drive is in an alarm state Bit 7 Fault When set the drive is faulted Bit 8 At Speed When set the drive is at the commanded speed Bit 9 11 Local ID 0 2 1 Bit 12 15 Spd Ref ID 0 3 ES Do a 2112 Jw o FS e sls 4 00 002 266 ee ie fe Z Z j IS g2 ella 2 m Ele 3 2e fe fe 8 8 STG a 825 SE dd lo vd 3 5 S z E z d 2 2 lo e e Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 O 1110 11 Bit 15 114 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 Bits 1 Bits 15 14 113 12 Description 11 110 9 Description 0 0 10 0 Spd Re
20. UsrDefBitWrdB7 UsrDefBitWrdB8 UsrDefBitWrdB9 UsrDefBitWrdB10 UsrDefBitWrdB11 UsrDefBitWrdB12 UsrDefBitWrdB13 UsrDefBitWrdB14 UsrDefBitWrdB15 UsrDefBitWrdB 2 32 64 1024 4096 5218 Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input or output The bit number corresponds to the digital input output number e g digital input 3 uses UsrDefBitWrdA3 Relay Outputs 1 and 2 use bits 14 and 15 respectively UsrDefBitWrdB0 UsrDefBitWrdB1 UsrDefBitWrdB2 UsrDefBitWrdB3 UsrDefBitWrdB4 UsrDefBitWrdB5 UsrDefBitWrdB6 UsrDefBitWrdB7 UsrDefBitWrdB8 UsrDefBitWrdB9 UsrDefBitWrdB10 UsrDefBitWrdB11 UsrDefBitWrdB12 UsrDefBitWrdB13 UsrDefBitWrdB14 UsrDefBitWrdB15 Bit variables The individual User Defined bits can be read or written to Itis possible to process a word with Par 536 UsrDefBitWrdB See the example in Par 536 UsrDefBitWrdB Note You can read bits 0 7 of a digital input with Par 536 UsrDefBitWrdB and write all of the bits associated with UsrDefBitWrdB to a digital output 1 no 1 M oul DO mn aa ou Dw amp Pp 21 1024 21 4096 o0o0o0o00 000 1000 0 Values Default Min Max Default Min Max 0 0 65535 0 1 Related 537 552 536 Communications File File COMMUNICATIONS Group Comm Control Masks amp Owners al 97 al 98 Programming and Parameters
21. AC Line Freq 588 Drive Type 300 Software Version 331 Motor Control Motor Data Max Ref Speed 45 Rated Motor Volt 175 Nom Mtr Fid Amps 280 oy Max Feedback Spd 162 Nom Mtr Arm Amps 179 Drv Fld Brdg Cur 374 Field Config Field Reg Enable 497 Field Mode Sel 469 Fld Weaken Ratio 456 Field Economy En 499 Max Fld Curr Pct 467 Field Econ Delay 1407 Min Fld Curr Pct 468 Torq Attributes Current Limit 7 Torque Ref 39 Zero Torque 353 Current Lim Pos 8 Trim Torque 40 Current Lim Neg 9 Torque Reduction 342 Speed Feedback Fdbk Device Type 414 Anlg Tach Zero 563 SpdReg FB Bypass 458 Anlg Tach Gain 562 Spd Fdbk Control 457 Autotune Autotune Cur Lim 1048 Spd Reg Autotune 1027 Spd Tune Inertia 1030 CurrReg Autotune 452 Speed Tune Dir 1029 SpdTune Friction 1031 Arm Resistance 453 Speed Tune Kp 1032 Arm Inductance 454 Speed Tune Ki 1033 er Command Limits Minimum Speed 1 Min Speed Rev 6 Max Speed Fwd 3 Min Speed Fwd 5 Maximum Speed 2 Max Speed Rev 4 Discrete Speeds Jog Speed 266 Preset Speed 3 156 Preset Speed 6 159 Preset Speed 1 154 Preset Speed 4 157 Preset Speed 7 160 Preset Speed 2 155 Preset Speed 5 158 TB Manual Ref 267 Speed Trim Ramp 42 Trim Speed 43 Speed Ratio 1017 References Trim Ramp Pct 378 Trim Speed Pct 379 Speed Regulator need Reg En 242 Spd Reg Kp 87 Spd Reg Ki 88 Arm Volt Kp 493 Arm Volt Ki 494 Dynamic Control Ramp Rates ened Ramp En 245 Decel T
22. Scale5 Output 1246 Scale6 Output Parameter number to which the value of the Scale block output is written Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information 486 Scale1 Mul Default 1 00 0 er Mul Min Max 4 10000 00 1229 Scale4 Mul O 1238 Scale5 Mul 1247 Scale6 Mul Multiplier of the input quantity after a possible limitation Resolution 5 digits Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information 487 Scale1 Div Default 1 00 ol Min Max 10000 00 1230 Scale4 Div O 1239 Scale5 Div 1248 Scale6 Div Divisor through which it is possible to divide the input quantity already multiplied and limited Resolution 5 digits Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information 488 Scale1 In Max Default 0 00 557 Scale2 In Max E 1222 Scale3 In Max Min Max 28 4281 o 1231 Scale4 In Max 1240 Scale5 In Max 1249 Scale6 In Max Maximum limit of the input quantity Resolution 5 digits Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information 489 pee In Min Default 0 00 558 Scale2 In Min 1223 Scale3 In Min Min Max 2 24 1 o 1232 Scale4 In Min 1241 Scale5 In Min 1250 Scale6 In Min Minimum limit of the input quantity Resolution 5 digits Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information File APPLICATIONS Scale Blocks Diameter Calc 559
23. Speed Threshold Indicates if the drive is above or below the threshold speed specified in parameters 101 Speed Thresh Pos clockwise rotation and 102 Speed Thresh Neg counter clockwise rotation e 0 Above Thresh The speed has exceeded the set speed threshold e 1 Below Thresh The speed has not exceeded the set speed threshold Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output At Speed Indicates whether or not the current speed of the drive corresponds to the speed reference specified in Par 118 Speed Reg In before the speed regulator and the ramp reference if enabled are applied The speed above and below the speed reference at which At Speed will indicate 1 Equal is set in Par 104 At Speed Error e 0 Not Equal The drive is not working at the set speed reference e 1 Equal The drive is working at the set speed reference Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output It also corresponds to the At Speed indication on the Status Line of the HIM At Zero Speed Indicates whether or not the actual speed of the motor is below the zero speed threshold as specified in Par 107 Speed Zero Level e 0 Equal The actual speed is below the value of Par 107 Speed Zero Level and Par 108 Speed Zero Delay has timed out e 1 Not Equal The actual speed is above the value of Par 107 Speed Zero Level Note This parameter can be assigned to a
24. e After receipt and inspection repack the drive in its original shipping container and store in a clean dry place e Place where the ambient temperatures do not exceed 25 C 13 F or 55 C 131 F e Place where the relative air humidity range does not exceed 5 95 e At an altitude of less than 3 000 meters 10 000 ft above sea level p 2 Overview Drive Nameplate Data Drive Frame Sizes Reference Materials The PowerFlex DC drive contains a data nameplate located on the side of each drive that identifies the specific model number design applicable AC input power and DC output power data All communication with Rockwell Automation personnel concerning this product should include this information cat No 20P41AD4P1RAONNN UL Type OPEN IP20 Series A VADC Standard Note Certification Original Firmware V 1 001 __ c C Or Marks Location Input 460VAC 50 60 Hz 3 3A 3 Phase Output 500VDC 4 14 REGEN 1 0HP 1 Min Overload Amps 6 2 Listed 3 Sec Overload Amps 82 Le yj Refer to the data DC Field nameplate label Input 460VAC 50 60 Hz 10A max 1 Phase on your drive for Output 360VDC 10A max actual agency Regulator Power 115 230VAC 50 60 Hz 1 0 0 5A 1 Phase certifications MFD in 2XXX on MMM DD Frame A j Serial Number A23E0042 SD Aer AAK NE y Similar PowerFlex DC drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering dimensioning etc Refer
25. eee cette eens C 14 Speed Up Function sorore aae EN one ie ls Rohe ei ee ae aa C 17 Speed Threshold Indicators 2 0 0 0 eee neces C 17 Speed Zero FUNCION 2 vise i sak A a die Sie ea ale C 19 Speed Draw Function rio a bee oe C 19 Start At POWerupuu iden uaee ea WG eee se Ree esl gd E YE Ane RSE eon Ee C 21 Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Index Fine Tuning the Resul t rs vissa AE eae eee aaa eta de C 22 Manually Adjusting the Current Regulator Tune Settings C 22 Fine Tuning the Field Current Regulator 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee C 23 Fine Tuning the Speed Regulator 0 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee eee C 26 Fine Tuning the Voltage Regulator in the Field Converter C 28 Tuning the Field Current Curve 0 0 0 0c ccc ene en ene C 30 Control Block Diagrams Diagram Conventions sm ses hesten bance Heya rada arabe es eet Installing a Communication Adapter Communication Adapter Kits 0 0 eee cnn eee eens What The Communication Adapter Kit Includes 0 0 0 0 0 0 02 ee eee Tools That You N ed iss 20g rar la eis eles Mega he we Safety PreCautronsy mia o ech wes es hee gle Strie led Installing the Communication Adapter Module in the Drive 4 Optional Analog and Digital I O Expansion Circuit Board What This Option Board Provides 0 0 0 cece cece ce eee ene VO Expansion Board Wiring 2 2 1 cent ene ae Optio
26. 1224 1233 1242 1251 491 560 1225 1234 1243 1252 492 561 1226 1235 1244 1253 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Scale1 In Off Scale2 In Off Scale3 In Off Scale4 In Off Scale5 In Off Scale6 In Off Offset to be added to the input quantity Resolution 5 digits Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information Scale1 Out Off Scale2 Out Off Scale3 Out Off Scale4 Out Off Scale5 Out Off Scale6 Out Off Offset to be added to the output quantity Resolution 5 digits Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information Scale1 In Abs Scale2 In Abs Scale3 In Abs Scale4 In Abs Scale5 In Abs Scale6 In Abs Controls how the input value is processed e Off The input quantity is processed with its sign e On The input quantity is processed with a positive sign absolute value It is possible to have the polarity change with the signs of the ScalexMul or ScalexDiv parameters Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information Diameter Calc Enables Disables the diameter calculation function If this parameter has been programmed via a digital input it must be brought to a logical high level e 0 The diameter calculation is disabled e 1 The diameter calculation is enabled Dn
27. Not Active The drive is not operating with a positive torque reference Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output Torque Negative Indicates whether the drive is operating with a negative torque reference e 1 Active The drive is operating with negative torque reference The motor is accelerating in the reverse direction or decelerating in the forward direction and Par 20 Ramp Delay has timed out e 0 Not Active The drive is not operating with negative torque reference Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output and is used for four quadrant drives only CurrLimit Active Indicates whether or not the drive is working within the set current limits e 1 Active The drive is currently in a current limited state e 0 Not Active The drive is not in a current limited state Note This parameter is assigned to digital output 4 Par 148 Digital Out4 Sel by default Spd Limit Active Indicates whether the current speed reference value is limited by the defined minimum and maximum limit values e 1 Active The reference value is currently limited since the value entered is out of range of the limit values defined e 0 Not Active The reference value is within the defined limit values Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max
28. Par 162 RPM 0 100 0 001 0 250 S 750 756 750 756 750 756 750 756 750 756 750 756 1193 File MOTOR CONTROL Group Speed Feedback 455 457 458 562 563 652 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Encoder PPR Number of pulses per revolution of the digital encoder The value of Pars 169 Encoder PPR and 162 Max Feedback Spd must be set as indicated in Speed Feedback on page C 12 Fdbk Device Type The source of speed feedback e 1 Encoder Digital encoder e 2 DC Tach DC analog tachometer e 3 Armature Internal measurement of the armature voltage Spd Fdbk Error The maximum allowable speed feedback error expressed as a percentage of the maximum output voltage set in Par 175 Rated Motor Volt By means of Par 175 Rated Motor Volt Par 456 Fld Weaken Ratio and the motor nominal speed a relationship between motor speed and armature voltage is obtained If the difference is higher than the value set in Par 455 Spd Fdbk Error an Encoder Loss fault F91 occurs Spd Fdbk Control Enables Disables speed feedback control This function controls the speed feedback where a comparison is made between the armature voltage and the speed value read by the encoder or tachometer When the value set in Par 455 Spd Fdbk Error is signaled the fault message Encoder Loss F91 displays This
29. Par 924 5 Spd Draw Out Par 1018 17 Analog In 3 Par 80 29 Filtered Cur Par 928 6 Trim Speed Par 43 18 Fld Current Par 234 30 Output Power Par 1052 Spd Reg In Par 118 19 UserDefined0 Par 503 131 Roll Diam Par 1154 4 8 Spd Reg Out Par 236 20 UserDefined1 Par 504 32 Tension Ref Par 1180 Torque Ref Par 39 21 UserDefined4 Par 507 33 Torque Curr Par 1193 10 Trim Torque Par 40 22 UserDefined5 Par 508 34 Winder Ref Par 1217 11 Torg Reg In Par 41 23 UserDefined6 Par 509 35 Active Comp Par 1213 1 0 10V 100 of Par 45 Max Ref Speed 2 10V 4 200 of Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps 3 10V 200 of Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps x Par 233 Output Voltage 4 As a percentage of Par 1153 Max Diameter 3 63 Related 7 76 81 3 64 Programming and Parameters D o Parameter Name amp Description ic See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Digital In1 Sel Default 2 Stop CP Digital In2 Sel Default 3 Start O Digital In3 Sel Default 11 Jog Digital In4 Sel Default 1 Enable Digital In5 Sel Default 17 Speed Sel 1 Digital In6 Sel Defa
30. RunRev Level 26 Accel 2 42 UsrDefinedA5 58 Diam Preset1 11 Jog A 27 Decel 2 43 UsrDefinedA6 59 Taper Enable 12 Jog Forward 28 MOP Inc 44 UsrDefinedA7 60 Spd DemandEn 13 Jog Reverse 29 MOP Dec 45 Droop Enable 61 Winder Side 14 Aux Fault 30 Fast Stop 46 PD Enable 62 PI PD Enable 15 Clear Faults 31 Contactor 47 PID SetptSel 63 Jog TW En 1 A digital input 1 8 only must be configured for Enable 2 This option is not available Reserved for digital inputs 9 12 e a 2 e e 2 a Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Option Definitions for Digital Inx Sel Note When assigning digital inputs to certain options that are associated with parameters those parameter values may be overwritten by the state of the digital input Option Description Enable Asserting the input causes the motor to coast to stop without generating a fault Stop CF Stops the drive if running or jogging or clears a fault if the drive is already stopped Start ssues a Start command removal does not Stop the drive 3 wire control Fwd Reverse Selects the operating direction of the drive Run ssues a Start command removal causes t
31. Speed Ratio Par 1017 5 Torque Ref Par 39 14 UserDefined2 Par 505 23 Tension Red Par 1179 6 Trim Torque Par 40 15 UserDefined3 Par 506 24 Tension Ref Par 1180 7 TB Man Ref Par 267 16 Load Comp Par 698 25 Diam Preset3 Par 1167 8 Pos Cur Lim Par 8 17 PID Setpt 0 Par 760 71 Anlg In1 Config Default O 4 10V 1322 76 Anlg In2 Config a la 81 Anig In3 Config Options Ci O Selects the signal input voltage or current mode for the analog 2 0 20mA input Configure switches S9 S10 and S11 on the Control 3 4to 20mA board according to the input signal used The inputs of the drive n are factory set for voltage signals Refer to DIP Switch and 3 Jumper Settings on page 1 28 for information on switch configuration 8 e 10V A maximum voltage of 10V is connected to the pa analog input If the signal is used as a reference value a 55 polarity reversal can be used to reverse the rotation direction of the drive four quadrant only when Par 1322 Direction Mode 1 Bipolar Two quadrant drives accept only positive references as the speed reference Negative references are not accepted and the drive will run at zero speed e 0 10V A maximum voltage of 10V is connected to the analog input For reference values only positive references are allowed e 0 20mA maximum current s
32. 0 1 10 00 0 00 150 00 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 00 150 00 100 0 5000 ms 1500 0 8191 RPM 1 00 0 00 32 00 m 1 00 0 00 32 00 m Related 1162 1206 1207 1286 1160 1284 1168 1153 1159 1158 799 1153 799 1153 File APPLICATIONS Group Diameter Calc Winder Functions No 1166 1167 1168 1206 1207 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Diam Preset 2 Third preset starting diameter The value of this parameter must be set between the value of Pars 799 Minimum Diameter and 1153 Max Diameter Diam Preset 3 Fourth preset starting diameter The value of this parameter must be set between the value of Pars 799 Minimum Diameter and 1153 Max Diameter This parameter can be assigned to an analog input If an analog input is used 10V corresponds to the value of Max Diameter and the voltage corresponding to the minimum diameter 10 x Minimum Diameter Max Diameter Diam Preset Sel Selects the starting diameter for the Diameter Calculation function e 0 Par 1164 Diam Preset 0 e Par 1165 Diam Preset 1 e 2 Par 1166 Diam Preset 2 e 3 Par 1167 Diam Preset 3 This parameter can also be set via two digital inputs programmed as 57 Diam Preset0 and 58 Diam Preset1 the selection in this case is carried out with bina
33. 014 019 029 027 038 035 8 8 19 4 11 24 3 055 045 052 073 073 10 8 23 8 13 28 7 093 086 110 100 129 1 3 1 4 Installation and Wiring Figure 1 3 Frame B Approximate Dimensions A Al A2 B B1 C mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 311 12 2 275 10 8 16 5 0 65 388 15 3 375 14 8 350 13 8 Table 1 B Frame B Weights Weight Drive w ND Rating Code Drive Drive amp Packaging 230V 460V kg Ibs kg Ibs 146 167 25 5 56 2 27 5 60 6 180 207 218 265 250 29 5 65 0 31 5 69 4 360 330 32 70 5 34 75 434 412 Installation and Wiring 1 5 Figure 1 4 Frame C Approximate Dimensions A Al B B1 B2 B3 B4 C mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in jmm in mm in 521 20 5 499 19 7 511 20 1 400 15 7 1200 7 9 55 2 2 56 2 2 416 16 4 Table 1 C Frame C Weights Weight Regenerative Drives Weight Non regenerative Drives Drive w ND Rating Code Drive Drive amp Packaging Drive Drive amp Packaging 230V 460V kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs 495 61 134 5 74 163 1 57 125 7 170 154 3 521 667 65 143 3 81 178 6 62 136 7 75 165 3 Lifting PowerFlex DC Drives The dimensi
34. 1 The value of Max Ref Speed cannot exceed 8192 RPM a Ro 3 23 Related 3 24 SPEED COMMAND Speed Regulator 100 101 102 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Trim Ramp This value is added to the speed reference just before the Speed Ramp function Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input Trim Speed This value is added to the speed reference just before the speed regulator and after the Speed Ramp function Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input Trim Ramp Pct Trim ramp value defined as a percentage of the value defined in Par 45 Max Ref Speed Trim Speed Pct Trim speed reference value defined as a percentage of the of the value defined in Par 45 Max Ref Speed Speed Ratio Determines the speed ratio value for the Speed Draw function Note This value can be input to the drive digitally or via an analog input Spd Reg Kp Proportional gain of the speed regulator that can be adjusted while the drive is running Spd Reg Ki Integral gain of the speed regulator that can be adjusted while the drive is running Spd Reg Kp Base The proportional gain Kp of the speed regulator base value Spd Reg Ki Base The integral gain K p of the speed regulator base value Spd Reg Kp Outpt Displays the active proportional coefficient of the speed
35. 1 bit pattern at the time of the last fault 0 Condition False 1 Condition True A JA JQ JQ a JH Jo y 5 S l B 3 5 5 S EE EE SEILE 3 12 S SE le le BERRE ESA 8 18 8 8 amp 3 volado S S S 23 E z A 2 2 0 2 e Defaut 10 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 10 41110 00 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 B 2 1 0 1350 Status2 at Fault Captures and displays Par 382 Drive Status 2 bit pattern at the time of the last fault 0 Condition False 1 Condition True 2 gg eee eje gels E Sole le i o slos o 8 98 slo LIES lt Lis g g lg ls ig 8 2 8 5 5 2 9535 o r E E E E E lt lt O N S E lt X E Defaut x x x x Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx 0 00 1 31 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 51 Related 381 382 3 52 UTILITY Faults Alarms Programming and Parameters 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 473 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Fault 1 Code Fault 2 Code Fault 3 Code Fault 4 Code Fault 5 Code Fault 6 Code Fault 7 Code Fault 8 Code Fault 9 Code Fault 10 Code A code that represents the fault that tripped the drive The codes will appear in these parameters in the order they occur i e Fault 1 Code the most recent fault Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4 4 for a list of possible codes Fault 1 Time Fault 2 Time Fault 3 Time Fault 4 T
36. 1 1 1 M1 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1379 Port Mask Act Read Only Bits 0 5 indicate status for DPI port communication Bit 15 indicates when security software is controlling the parameter 0 Not Active 1 Active x Reserved F oO N o ppal fe gee e ENE E IS 8 8 8 le 8 12 2 5 2 amp 8 8 3 o 8 53 3153 3 53533539 a nn fa 3 DN LI Z XX z z z A a a a T Defaut 0 x x k Xx Xx K Xx IX x 1 1 41 M1 n Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 File INPUT OUTPUT Programming and Parameters 3 61 Input Output File g 3 3 Parameter Name Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 70 Anlg Ini Sel Default 1 Speed Ref A 75 Anlg In2 Sel Default 0 Of O 80 Anlg In3 Sel Default 0 off Selects the parameter to which a value will be written from the analog input Options 0 Off No signal Neg Cur Lim Par 9 18 PI CentralV3 Par 778 1 Speed Ref A Par 44 10 Jog Ref Par 266 19 PID Feedback Par 763 2 Speed Ref B Par 48 11 Adaptive Ref Par 183 20 Fid Cur Max Par 467 3 Trim Ramp Par 42 12 UserDefined0 Par 503 21 OutVoltLevel Par 233 4 Trim Speed Par 43 13 UserDefined1 Par 504 22
37. 1 Sel uses bit 14 only Par 629 Relay Out 2 Sel uses bit 15 only Stop Control Energized 1 at run and de energized 0 based on the value of Par 627 Spd 0 Trip Delay Field Loss 0 indicates the loss of the field voltage current while the drive is running Spd Fbk Loss 0 indicates the loss of Speed Feedback Encoder due to an excessive calculated error as determined by the drive firmware Encoder Err 0 indicates a loss of the DC tachometer or encoder Matches the state of Par 651 Encoder State Diam Calc Energized 1 when Par 800 Diameter Calc St 1 and de energized 0 when Diameter Calc St 0 Input Cmp 1 indicates that the value of analog input 1 is inside the comparison window 0 indicates that the value of analog input 1 is outside the comparison window Par 1045 Anlg In1 Cmp Eq Diam Reached Energized 1 when the value of Par 1158 Diam Threshold has been exceeded Speed Match Energized 1 when the value of Par 1203 Spd Match Compl 1 launching ramp completed Accelerating 1 indicates that the drive is actively accelerating The state of the assigned digital output matches the state of bit 4 Accelerating of Par 381 Drive Status 1 and the state of Par 1188 Accel Status Decelerating When set to 1 the drive is actively decelerating The state of the assigned di
38. 149 Relay Out 1 Sel 1392 Digital Out2 Sel 146 Digital Out6 Sel 150 Relay Out 2 Sel 629 Digital Out3 Sel 147 Digital Out7 Sel 151 DPI P1 Select 1323 DPI P2 Select 1324 DPI P3 Select 1325 DPI P4 Select 1326 DPI Inputs DPI P5 Select 1327 3 6 Programming and Parameters Advanced Parameter View Parameter 211 Param Access Lvl set to option 1 Advanced File Group Parameters Monitor Speed Meters Speed Ref A 44 Ramp In Pct 111 Spd Feedback 122 Speed Ref A Pct 47 Ramp Out 113 Spd Feedback Pct 121 Speed Ref B 48 Ramp Out Pct 114 Actual Speed 924 Speed Ref B Pct 49 Speed Draw Out 1018 Encoder Speed 420 Speed Ref Out 385 Spd Draw Out Pct 1019 Tachometer Speed 1408 Spd Ref Out Pct 384 Speed Reg In 118 Ramp In 110 Speed Reg In Pct 117 Current Meters Spd Reg Out Pct 236 Field Current 351 Filt TorqCur Pct 928 Current Reg In 41 Fld Current Pct 234 Field Ref Pct 500 Arm Current 200 Cur Lim Pos Out 10 Arm Current Pct 199 Cur Lim Neg Out 11 Drive Data FaultCode 57 Output Voltage 233 Drive Size 465 AC Line Voltage 466 Output Power 1052 Elapsed Lifetime 235 AC Line Freq 588 Drive Type 300 Software Version 331 Motor Control Motor Data Max Ref Speed 45 Nom Mtr Arm Amps 179 Drive Type Sel 201 Max Feedback Spd 162 Nom Mtr Fld Amps 280 Rated Motor Volt 175 Drv Fld Brdg Cur 374 Field Config Fi
39. 3 778 PI Central v3 x1000 This value is only used by the PID regulator when the drive is powered up and Par 769 Enable PI is already enabled Note Par 779 PI Central v sel can be set directly from the HIM or through two digital inputs set respectively as Pl central vs0 and PI central vs1 Refer to Pars 780 PI Central vs0 and 781 PI Central vs1 for more information on this configuration PI Central vs0 When assigned to a digital input and used in combination with Par 781 PI Central vs1 through binary selection determines which of the four possible output values is used as the initial level of the integral component corresponding to the initial diameter of the PI block Par 780 Par 781 0 0 Selects the value in Par 771 PI Output 0 1 Par 776 PI Central v1 1 0 Par 777 PI Central v2 1 1 Par 778 PI Central v3 PI Central vs1 The output selector of the initial PI block With the value of Par 780 PI Central vs0 determined through binary selection what between the four possible settings of the integral initial level correspondent to initial diameter can be used See Par 780 Pl Central vs0 for binary selections PI integr freeze Locks the selections made for the integral component of the PID regulator PI Upper Limit Defines the upper limit of the adapting block for correction of the PI block PI Lower Limit Defines the lower limit of the adapting bl
40. 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 1328 Drive Logic Rslt The final logic command resulting from the combination of all DPI and discrete inputs This parameter has the same structure as the product specific logic command received via DPI and is used in peer to peer communications For each bit 1 Condition true and 0 Condition false Bit 0 Stop Stop command Bit 1 Start Start command Bit 2 Jog Jog command Bit 3 Clear Faults Clear faults command Bit 4 Forward Forward direction command Bit 5 Reverse Reverse direction command Bit 6 Local Local control command Bit 7 MOP Inc MOP Increment command Bit 8 Accel 1 Acceleration Rate 1 command Bit 9 Accel 2 Acceleration Rate 2 command Bit 10 Decel 1 Deceleration Rate 1 command Bit 11 Decel 2 Deceleration Rate 2 command Bit 12 14 Spd Ref ID 0 2 Speed reference source Bit 15 MOP Dec MOP Decrement command Decel 2 Decel 1 2 Accel 2 S Accel 1 SiSpd Ref ID 2 Spd Ref ID 1 SISpd Ref ID 0 MOP Dec o Default Bit N SIMOP Inc gt E Local E Reverse gt gt Forward 2 Clear Faults NS Jog 2 Start S Stop a e P ine o Bits 4 pry wo N Description No Command Manual Mode Spd Ref A Auto Spd Ref B Auto
41. 3 If you are using the HIM on the drive cover Port 1 for the speed reference set Par 70 Anlg In1 Sel to 0 Off Access the Digital Inputs group and configure the following parameters 1 Par 1391 ContactorControl Select the type of contactor s used with the drive 1 Contactor default AC input or DC output contactor 2 Contactor DB AC input or DC output contactor and dynamic brake contactor or 0 None Note If you select 0 None for Par 1391 ContactorControl a CntactrCflct alarm will display The alarm will be resolved and automatically clear when you complete the Digital Output configuration below Note If Par 1391 ContactorControl is set to 1 or 2 an Auxiliary Status contactor must be wired to a digital input default for digital input 8 1 Par 140 Digital In8 Sel If a contactor is NOT used set to other than 31 Contactor e g 0 Not Used 3 Tf an auxiliary status contactor is wired to a digital input set the appropriate Digital Inx Sel parameter to 31 Contactor 2 8 Drive Start Up 11 Access the Digital Outputs group and configure the following parameters 1 Ifa contactor and a dynamic brake resistor is used O Par 629 Relay Out 2 Sel 24 ContactorDB C1 If a neither a contactor and a dynamic brake resistor is used O Par 629 Relay Out 2 Sel Set to other than 24 ContactorDB or 25 Contactor e g 0
42. 445 Spd Up Gain Pct Speed Up Filter The time constant of the filter for the D derivative component of the Speed Up function SpdReg Kp Bypass The proportional gain Kp of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of Par 93 Spd Reg Kp Base when an encoder or tachometer feedback signal is changed to armature feedback Par 458 SpdReg FB Bypass Enabled SpdReg Ki Bypass The integral gain Kj of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of Par 94 Spd Reg Ki Base when an encoder or tachometer feedback signal is changed to armature feedback Par 458 SpdReg FB Bypass Enabled Arm Volt Kp Proportional gain Kp of the field voltage regulator expressed as a percentage of the value defined in Par 495 Arm Volt Kp Base Arm Volt Ki Integral gain Kj of the field voltage regulator expressed as a percentage of the value defined in Par 496 Arm Volt Ki Base Arm Volt Kp Base The proportional gain Kp of the field voltage regulator base value Arm Volt Ki Base The integral coefficient Kjo of the field voltage regulator base value SpdFuncSelect Selection of the Speed Up or Inertia Loss compensation function Note that these two functions are mutually exclusive if one is selected the other is off InertiaCompAct Displays the active compensation of the fixed section as a percentage of the drive rated current InertiaCompVar Displays the
43. 456 Fld Weaken Ratio Motor nameplate base speed Par 45 Max Ref Speed x 100 Important When operating the drive in field weakening mode it is necessary to refer to the CEMF value or to the crossover data If the maximum field current is not within 10 of the maximum value of the internal field converter configure the current feedback using DIP switch S14 Refer to Field Current Resistors on page 1 20 10 Drive Start Up 2 7 Access the Utility file and press Enter Access the Alarms group and configure the following parameters 4 Par 481 UnderVolt Thresh Enter the value at which a drive under voltage condition will be detected default 230V 4 Par 584 OverCurrent Thr Enter the value at which a drive over current condition will be detected default 175 The threshold level should be at least 10 above the selected operating current limit Par 7 Current Limit Access the Input amp Output file and press Enter Access the Analog Inputs group and configure the following m If you have connected a potentiometer to analog input 1 for a speed reference O Verify that Par 70 Anlg In1 Sel is set to 1 Speed Ref A default O Verify that switch S9 and Par 71 Anlg In1 Config are configured to match voltage versus a current signal Refer to DIP Switch and Jumper Settings on page 1 28 O Set Par 72 Anlg In1 Scale and Par 74 Anlg In1 Offset appropriately
44. 5 o o ip A 0 O A O g 8 8 3 8 lg lols lo 8 8 ja ja 1 amp gt E E E EE E je E je E O AO O ja O JA Defaut X x x X x x x Xx Xx xk 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 601 Start Owner See Stop Owner The adapters that are presently issuing a valid start command 602 Jog Owner See Stop Owner The adapters that are presently issuing a valid jog command 603 Direction Owner See Stop Owner The adapter that currently has exclusive control of direction changes 604 Reference Owner See Stop Owner The adapter that has the exclusive control of the command frequency source selection 605 Accel Owner See Stop Owner 24 The adapter that has exclusive control of the acceleration 660 ramp rate Pars 660 Accel Time 1 and 24 Accel Time 2 for COMMUNICATIONS Masks amp Owners the drive 606 Fault Clr Owner See Stop Owner Adapter that is presently clearing a fault 607 MOP Owner See Stop Owner Adapters that are currently issuing increases or decreases in MOP command frequency 608 Local Owner See Stop Owner Adapter that has requested exclusive control of all drive logic functions If an adapter is in local lockout all other functions except stop on all other adapters are locked out and non functional Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running 609 Decel Owner See Stop Owner 32 The adapter that has exclusive control of the deceleration 662 r
45. 518 UserDefined15 User Defined 3 54 591 Logic Mask Masks 8 Owners 3 57 519 UsrDefBitWrdA User Defined 3 54 Security 3 59 520 UsrDefBitWrdA0 User Defined 355 592 Start Mask Masks 8 Owners 3 57 521 UsrDefBitWrdAt User Defined 355 598 Jog Mask Masks amp Owners 3 57 522 UsrDefBitWrdA2 User Defined 355 594 Direction Mask Masks amp Owners 3 57 523 UsrDefBitWrdA3 User Defined 355 595 Reference Mask Masks amp Owners 57 524 UsmDetBiWrdA4 User Defined 355 596 Accel Mask Masks amp Owners 3 57 525 UsrDefBitWrdA5 User Defined 355 597 Fault Clr Mask Masks amp Owners 3 57 526 UsrDefBitWrdAG User Defined 355 99005 MOR MAE Masks amp Owners 3 57 527 UsrDefBitWrdA7 User Defined 355 599 Local Mask Masks amp Owners 3 58 528 UsrDefBitWrdA8 User Defined 355 600 Stop Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 529 UsrDefBitWrdA9 User Defined 355 801 _ Start Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 530 UsrDefBitWrdA10 User Defined 3 55 602 Jog Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 531 UsrDefBitWrdAtt User Defined 355 603 Direction Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 532 UsrDefBitWrdA12 User Defined 355 604 Reference Owner Masks amp Owners 58 533 UsrDefBitWrdA13 User Defined 355 805 Accel Owner Masks 8 Owners 3 58 534 UsrDefBitWrdA14 User Defined 355 606 Fault Cir Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 535 UsrDefBitWrdAt15 User Defined 355 607 MOP Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 536 UsrDefBitWrdB User Defined 35
46. 57 Digital Out4 Sel 148 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Clr Mode 1348 Faults 3 51 Digital Out5 Sel 149 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Clr Owner 606 Masks amp Owners 3 58 Digital Out6 Sel 150 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Field Amps 1373 Diagnostics 3 52 Digital Out7 Sel 151 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Speed 1372 Diagnostics 3 52 Digital Out8 Sel 152 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Voltage 1374 Diagnostics 3 52 Direction Mask 594 Masks amp Owners 3 57 FaultCode 57 Drive Data 3 13 Direction Mode 1322 Reference Config 3 45 Fdbk Device Type 414 Speed Feedback 3 19 Direction Owner 603 Masks amp Owners 3 58 Feed Fwd PID 758 PID Control 3 36 DncrPosSpd 795 Diameter Calc 3 39 Field Current 351 Current Meters 3 12 DPI Baud Rate 589 Comm Control 3 57 Field Econ Delay 1407 Field Config 3 16 DPI Fdbk Select 1321 Comm Control 3 57 Field Economy En 499 Field Config 3 15 DPI P1 Select 1323 DPI Inputs 3 70 Field Mode Sel 469 Field Config 3 15 DPI P2 Select 1324 DPI Inputs 3 70 Field Ref Pct 500 Current Meters 3 12 DPI P3 Select 1325 DPI Inputs 3 70 Field Reg Enable 497 Field Config 3 15 DPI P4 Select 1326 DPI Inputs 3 70 Filt Torg Cur 926 forque Attribute 3 18 DPI P5 Select 1327 DPI Inputs 3 70 Filt TorqCur Pct 928 Current Meters 3 12 DPI Port Sel 590 Comm Control 3 57 Final Diameter 1178 Winder Functions 3 42 DPI Port Value 1343 Comm Control 3 57 Fld Const 40 Pct 916 Field Config 3 16 Drive Alarm 1 1380 Alarms 3 53 Fld Const 70 Pct 917 Fie
47. 59 Anlg In2 Sel 75 Analog Inputs 3 61 Data Out B2 621 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In2 Targe 296 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data Out C1 622 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In2 Tune 260 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data Out C2 623 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In3 Config 81 Analog Inputs 3 61 Data Out D1 624 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In3 Offset 84 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data Out D2 625 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In3 Scale 82 Analog Inputs 3 61 Decel Mask 631 Masks amp Owners 3 58 Anlg In3 Sel 80 Analog Inputs 3 61 Decel Owner 609 Masks 8 Owners 3 58 Anlg In3 Targe 297 Analog Inputs 3 62 Decel Status 1189 Diagnostics 3 49 Anlg In3 Tune 261 Analog Inputs 3 62 Decel Time 1 662 Ramp Rates 3 29 Anlg Out1 Scale 62 Analog Outputs 3 63 Decel Time 2 32 Ramp Rates 3 29 Anlg Qut1 Sel 66 Analog Outputs 3 63 Diam Calc Dis 1161 Diameter Calc 3 40 Anlg Out2 Scale 63 Analog Outputs 3 63 Diam Inc Dec En 1205 Diameter Calc 3 41 Anlg Out2 Sel 67 Analog Outputs 3 63 Diam init filter 1206 Diameter Calc 3 41 Anlg Out3 Scale 64 Analog Outputs 3 63 Diam Preset 0 1164 Diameter Calc 3 40 Anlg Out3 Sel 68 Analog Outputs 3 63 Diam Preset 1 1165 Diameter Calc 3 40 Anlg Out4 Scale 65 Analog Outputs 3 63 Diam Preset 2 1166 Diameter Calc 3 41 Anlg Out4 Sel 69 Analog Outputs 3 63 Diam Preset 3 1167 Diameter Calc 3 41 Anlg Tach Gain 562 Speed Feedback 3 19 Diam Preset Sel 1168 Diameter Calc 3 41 Anlg Tach Zero 563 Speed Feedback 3 19 Diam stdy delay 1207 Diameter Calc 3 41 Anlg1 Tune Scale 73 Analog Inputs 3 61 Diam Threshol
48. 87 Spd Reg Kp Speed Regulator 3 24 5 Min Speed Fwd Limits 3 23 88 Spd Reg Ki Speed Regulator 3 24 6 Min Speed Rev Limits 3 2 91 Fld Reg Kp Field Config 3 14 T Current Limit Torque Attribute 3 16 92 Fld Reg Ki Field Config 3 14 8 Current Lim Pos Torque Attribute 3 16 93 Spd Reg Kp Base Speed Regulator 3 24 9 Current Lim Neg Torque Attribute 16 94 Spd Reg Ki Base Speed Regulator 24 10 Cur Lim Pos Out Current Meters 3 12 97 Fid Reg Kp Base Field Config 3 14 11 Cur Lim Neg Out Current Meters 3 12 98 Fld Reg Ki Base Field Config 3 14 13 Torq Red CurLim Load Limits 3 30 99 Spd Reg Kp Outpt Speed Regulator 24 18 Ramp Type Select Ramp Rates 3 28 100 Spd Reg Ki Outpt Speed Regulator 3 24 19 S Curve Time Ramp Rates 3 28 101 Speed Thresh Pos Speed Regulator 3 24 20 Ramp Delay Ramp Rates 2 102 Speed Thresh Neg Speed Regulator 24 22 MOP Accel Time Ramp Rates 3 28 103 Threshold Delay Speed Regulator 3 25 24 Accel Time 2 Ramp Rates 3 28 104 At Speed Error Speed Regulator 3 25 30 MOP Decel Time Ramp Rates 28 105 At Speed Delay Speed Regulator 25 32 Decel Time 2 Ramp Rates 3 29 106 Ref Zero Level Speed Regulator 3 25 38 Fast Stop Time Stop Modes 3 30 107 Speed Zero Level Speed Regulator 3 25 39 Torque Ref Torque Attribute 17 108 Speed Zero Delay Speed Regulator 25 40 Trim Torque Torque Attribute 3 17 110 Ramp In Speed Meters 3 11 4 Current Reg In Current Meters 3 12 111 Ramp In Pct Speed Meters 3 11 42 Trim Ramp Speed Reference 3 24 113 Ramp Out
49. At Speed Error CurrentLimit 0 indicates that the drive is not limiting output current 1 indicates that the drive is limiting the output current Ready 1 indicates that the drive is powered Enabled and no Start Inhibits exist The state of the assigned digital output matches the state of bit 2 Ready of Par 381 Drive Status 1 Ramp Pos 1 indicates that the actual speed of the drive is going positive Follows the state of Par 346 Torque Positive Not asserted until after the amount of time in Par 20 Ramp Delay has elapsed Ramp Neg 4 indicates that the actual speed of the drive is going negative Follows the state of Par 347 Torque Negative Not asserted until after the amount of time in Par 20 Ramp Delay has elapsed Spd Limited 1 indicates that the speed is being limited to the value of Par 3 Max Speed Fwd 0 indicates that the speed is not being limited Fault 0 indicates that a drive fault has occurred Refer to Par 57 Fault Code Power Loss 0 indicates that the drive has detected a loss of the internal power supply UserDefinedA Indicates the status of Par 519 UsrDefBitWrdA digital input 1 uses bit 0 digital input 2 uses bit 1 etc Par 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel uses bit 14 only Par 629 Relay Out 2 Sel uses bit 15 only UserDefinedB Indicates the status of Par 536 UsrDefBitWrdB digital input 1 uses bit O digital input 2 uses bit 1 etc Par 1392 Relay Out
50. C D 4 0 kit required Terminal Block 12 106 PE 2 129 U V W 3 0 C D 4 0 kit required Terminal Block 12 106 PE 2 PE 18 Bere PRO 10 50 442 5 PE 2 0 8 25 221 jeg g ON ud 10 50 442 5 PE 2 0 8 25 221 218 207 See lglg 10 50 442 5 PE 2 0 8 25 221 265 250 U V W 2x 4 0 C D 2x300 10 50 442 5 PE 2 0 8 25 221 330 2 x 300 U V W kit required 10 50 4425 CD 2 x 350 i kit required PE 2 0 8 25 221 360 412 2 x 500 U V W kit required 10 50 4425 CD 2x 600 y kit required PE 2 0 8 25 221 434 2 x 500 U V W kit required 10 50 4425 CD 2 x 600 kit required PE 2 0 8 25 221 Installation and Wiring 1 19 d Drive Current Rating Tightening E Code Wire Size Terminal Bolt Torque 230V 460V Terminals AWG kcmils Size mm N m Ibs in C 521 495 U V W 4x 4 0 CD 4x 250 10 50 442 5 PE 2 0 8 25 221 667 4 x 300 U V W Leia 10 50 442 5 CD 4 x 350 f kit required PE 2 0 8 25 221 1 Refer to Catalog Number Explanation on page Preface 4 positions 8 10 for corresponding drive HP rating armature amp rating and field amp rating Field Circuit Connections Figure 1 17 Frame A Field Circuit Terminal Block Location Bottom View On Figure 1 18 Frame B Field Circuit Terminal Block Location Top of drive Dil 1 20 Installation and Wiring Figure 1 19 Frame C Field Circuit Terminal Block Location
51. Fwd 5 Maximum Speed 2 Max Speed Rev 4 Discrete Speeds Jog Speed 266 Preset Speed 3 156 Preset Speed 6 159 Preset Speed 1 154 Preset Speed 4 157 Preset Speed 7 160 Preset Speed 2 155 Preset Speed 5 158 TB Manual Ref 267 Speed Trim Ramp 42 Trim Speed 43 Speed Ratio 1017 References Trim Ramp Pct 378 Trim Speed Pct 379 Speed Regulator Fur Reg En 242 Speed Thresh Neg 102 Flying Start En 388 Arm Volt Kp 493 Threshold Delay 103 Spd Fdbk Filter 444 Arm Volt Ki 494 At Speed Error 104 Spd Up Gain Pct 445 Spd Reg Kp 87 At Speed Delay 105 Speed Up Base 446 Spd Reg Ki 88 Ref Zero Level 106 Speed Up Filter 447 Arm Volt Kp Base 495 Speed Zero Level 107 SpdReg Kp Bypass 459 Arm Volt Ki Base 496 Speed Zero Delay 108 SpdReg Ki Bypass 460 Spd Reg Kp Base 93 Spd Zero En 123 SpdFuncSelect 1016 Spd Reg Ki Base 94 Spd Ref Zero En 124 InertiaCompAct 1191 Spd Reg Kp Outpt 99 Spd Zero P En 125 InertiaCompVar 1192 Spd Reg Ki Outpt 100 Spd Zero P Gain 126 Speed Thresh Pos 101 Lock Speed Integ 348 File Dynamic Control Programming and Parameters 3 7 Group Parameters Ramp Rates Speed Ramp En 245 MOP Accel Time 22 S Curve Decel 2 668 Ramp Type Select 18 MOP Decel Time 30 Ramp Delay 20 Accel Time 1 660 S Curve Time 19 Zero Ramp Output 344 Decel Time 1 662 S Curve Accel 1 665 Zero Ramp Input 345 Accel Time 2 24 S Curve Decel 1 666 Freeze
52. OFF OFF 300V OFF OFF OFF OFF Figure 1 31 Drive Size DIP Switch 15 Example Note Illustration for example only Table 1 0 Drives with 230V Input DIP Switch S15 Configuration E Drive Current Rating Code S15 1 S15 2 S15 3 S15 4 15 5 515 6 S15 7 S15 8 A 7P0 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 9P0 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 012 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 020 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 029 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 038 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 055 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 073 OFF OFF OFF JON OFF OFF OFF OFF 093 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 110 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF B 146 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 180 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 218 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 265 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 360 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 434 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF C 521 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Installation and Wiring 1 31 Table 1 P Drives with 460V Input DIP Switch S15 Configuration E Drive Current Rating Code Si5 1 S15 2 S15 3 S15 4 S15 5 S15 6 S15 7 S15 8 A 4P1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 6P0 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 010 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 014 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF JON OFF
53. Parameter number to which the PID Output value will be written Options 0 Not Used 16 Reserved 32 UsrDefined13 Par 516 1 Cur Lim Pos Par 8 17 Max Fld Pct Par 467 33 UsrDefined14 Par 517 2 Cur Lim Neg Par 9 18 Reserved 34 UsrDefined15 Par 518 3 Reserved 19 UsrDefined0 Par 503 35 Load Comp Par 698 4 Reserved 20 UsrDefined1 Par 504 36 Out Volt Lvl Par 921 5 TrqRedCurLim Par 13 21 UsrDefined2 Par 505 37 Reserved 6 Torque Ref Par 39 22 UsrDefined3 Par 506 38 Speed Ratio Par 1017 7 Trim Torque Par 40 23 UsrDefined4 Par 507 39 Reserved 8 Reserved 24 UsrDefined5 Par 508 40 Reserved 9 Trim Ramp Par 42 25 UsrDefined6 Par 509 41 Tension Red Par 1179 10 Trim Speed Par 43 26 UsrDefined7 Par 510 42 Reserved 11 Reserved 27 UsrDefined8 Par 511 43 Reserved 12 Reserved 28 UsrDefined9 Par 512 44 CloseLp Comp Par 1208 13 Reserved 29 UsrDefined10 Par 513 45 Reserved 14 Adaptive Ref Par 183 30 UsrDefined11 Par 514 46 Reserved 15 Reserved 31 UsrDefined12 Par 515 786 PID Source Default 0 Not Used A P
54. PowerFlex DC Drive s5836 D Relay Out 1 uy E Digital In 8 Series contactor status 75 amp 76 Relay Out 2 L Control C Board P S N O Relay DC Contactor DB Contactor N C Relay Table 1 E Power Terminal Designations Terminals Description Refer to U V W Three phase AC input to the armature converter Armature Converter C D DC output to the motor armature Connections on page 1 16 Ut VI Single phase AC input to the field circuit Field Circuit Connections on C1 D1 DC output to the motor field page 1 19 U2 V2 Single phase AC power for the control circuits Control Circuit Input Power on page 1 24 35 36 Normally open contact Configured with parameter 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel set to 36 Contactor by default e tl 75 76 Normally open contact Configured with parameter 629 Relay Out 2 Sel set to 5 Ready by default 78 79 Motor thermistor connections PTC Thermistors and Thermal Switches on page 1 21 U3 V3 Single phase AC power to the cooling fans frame C Frame C Heatsink Cooling drives only Fans and Internal Fuse Signal Terminals on page 1 26 81 82 Internal fuse signal frame C drives only Frame C Heatsink Cooling Fans and Internal Fuse Signal Terminals on page 1 26 1 16 Installation and Wiring Armature Converter Connections Figure 1 14 Frame A Armature Converter Terminal Block Location Bottom View Loosen the two scre
55. Preset Spd 3 Auto Preset Spd 4 Auto Preset Spd 5 Auto Preset Spd 6 Auto Preset Spd 7 Auto 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 m l al G lM o o r AAS TestPoint Sel Default 566 Selects the function whose value is displayed in TestPoint Val Min Max 566 574 These are internal values that are not accessible through any other parameters Typically these are internal drive variables and registers Refer to Testpoint Codes and Functions on page 4 14 for more information TestPoint Data Default Read Only The present value of the function selected in Par 1381 Testpoint Sel Min Max 231 231 1 TaskLoad 32 ms Default Read Only The load percentage of the 32 ms task in the firmware Min Max 0 00 100 00 TaskLoad 1 ms Default Read Only The load percentage of the 1 ms task in the firmware Min Max 0 00 100 00 TaskLoad 2 ms Default Read Only The load percentage of the 2 ms task in the firmware Min Max 0 00 100 00 TaskLoad 8 ms Default Read Only The load percentage of the 8 ms task in the firmware Min Max 0 00 100 00 Related File UTILITY Faults Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 1402 La
56. Read Only Min Max 0 200 Units Default Read Only Min Max 0 200 Units Default Read Only Min Max 200 Units Default Read Only Min Max 250 Units Default Read Only Min Max 2 5 x Nom Mtr Arm Amps Units A Default Read Only Min Max 0 00 100 00 Units Default Read Only Min Max 200 Units Default Read Only Min Max 0 00 99 90 Units A Default Read Only Min Max 0 00 100 00 Units Default Read Only Min Max 200 Units X Related 179 179 179 179 280 280 1193 File 57 No Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions FaultCode A code that represents the fault that tripped the drive Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4 4 for a list of fault codes and descriptions Output Voltage Armature Voltage Uga in Vay Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Elapsed Lifetime Shows the operating time of the drive This parameter counts the time for which the drive is energized even if the drive is disabled Drive Type Displays of the drive type 10 Non Regenerative 11 Regenerative Software Version Displays the software version number active in the drive Drive Size Armature current rating as indicated by the configuration of DIP switch 515 on the Control board Note S15 is set to the appropriate value a
57. Scale 62 Analog Out4 Scale 65 Anlg Out3 Sel 68 Analog Out2 Scale 63 Digital Inputs ContactorControl 1391 Digital In12 Sel 144 Dig In Term 1 565 Dig In Status 564 Inversion In 1 1276 Dig In Term 2 566 Digital In1 Sel 133 Inversion In 2 1277 Dig In Term 3 567 Digital In2 Sel 134 Inversion In 3 1278 Dig In Term 4 568 Digital In3 Sel 135 Inversion In 4 1279 Dig In Term 5 569 Digital In4 Sel 136 Inversion In 5 1280 Dig In Term 6 570 Digital In5 Sel 137 Inversion In 6 1281 Dig In Term 7 571 Digital In6 Sel 138 Inversion In 7 1282 Dig In Term 8 572 Digital In7 Sel 139 Inversion In 8 1283 Dig In Term 9 573 Digital In8 Sel 140 Inversion In 9 1387 Dig In Term 10 574 Digital In9 Sel 141 Inversion In 10 1388 Dig In Term 11 575 Digital In10 Sel 142 Inversion In 11 1389 Dig In Term 12 576 Digital In11 Sel 143 Inversion In 12 1390 Digital Outputs Dig Out Status 581 Digital Out7 Sel 151 Inversion Out 4 1270 Digital Out1 Sel 145 Digital Out8 Sel 152 Inversion Out 5 1271 Digital Out2 Sel 146 Relay Out 1 Sel 1392 Inversion Out 6 1272 Digital Out3 Sel 147 Relay Out 2 Sel 629 Inversion Out 7 1273 Digital Out4 Sel 148 Inversion Out 1 1267 Inversion Out 8 1274 Digital Out5 Sel 149 Inversion Out 2 1268 Inversion Relay1 1393 Digital Out6 Sel 150 Inversion Out 3 1269 Inversion Relay2 1275 DPI Inputs DPI P1 Select 1323 DPI P3 Select 1325 DPI P5 Select 1327 DP
58. The AC input voltage level below which an undervoltage fault F4 AC Min Max 0 1000 Undervoltage will be detected Units Vac Note Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of fault descriptions OverCurrent Thr Default 175 Value at which an overcurrent condition F13 Overcurrent will be Min Max 0 250 detected Units Note Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of fault descriptions Drive Alarm 1 Alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive For each bit 1 Condition true and 0 Condition false Bit 0 DiginCfictA Digital input functions are in conflict Bit 1 DiginCfIctB A digital Start input has been configured without a Stop input or other functions are in conflict Bit 2 DigInCfletC More than one physical input has been configured to the same input function Bit 3 BipolarCflct Parameter 1322 Direction Mode is set to Bipolar or Reverse Dis and one or more of the following digital input functions is configured Fwd Reverse Run Forward Run Reverse Jog Forward or Jog Reverse Bit 4 AnalogCflct Analog input functions are in conflict Bit 5 CntactrCflct Contactor input functions are in conflict Bit 6 Encoder Cflc Indicates an encoder configuration conflict Bit 7 Overvoltage There is an overvoltage on the armature circuit Bit 8 Over Temp The motor has exceeded its temperature rating as signaled by the thermisto
59. The amount of time corresponding to the lower acceleration deceler ation and fast deceleration time Int Acc Calc En Enables Disables the calculation for coil acceleration e Enabled This function carries out the calculation of the angular acceleration inside the drive In this case it is necessary to set just the value of Par 1182 Time AccDec Min e Disabled It is necessary to set Pars 1184 Line Accel Pct 1185 Line Decel Pct 1186 Line FastStp Pct and 1182 Time AccDec Min and to supply the corresponding status indication to the digital inputs Line Accel Pct Acceleration time as a percentage Par 1182 of Time AccDec Min Line Decel Pct Deceleration time as a percentage of Par 1182 Time AccDec Min Line FastStp Pct Es deceleration time as a percentage of Par 1182 Time AccDec in Winder Type Winder unwinder selection If the selection is carried out via a digital input OV Winder 24V Unwinder Torq Current Pct Displays the amount of torque current required Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Act Ten Ref Pct Displays the percentage of tension reference less the Taper percentage set via Par 1179 Tension Reduct If the Taper function is not enabled it corresponds to the value displayed in Par 1180 Tension Ref Speed Match Coil launching phase command for automatic switching Note This parameter can be assigned to a digit
60. Type and Size Tightening Tachometer Terminal Block Signal Type Terminals Analog and Digital O TB1 4 1 40 DC Analog Tach M3 and Flexible multi core Torque mm mm N m Ib in 0 140 1 500 0 140 1 500 26 16 0 4 3 5 1 32 Installation and Wiring Figure 1 32 1 0 Terminal Block Locations 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 y Terminal Block 3 SS VI l PA SEVEN Terminal Block 1 Table 1 R 1 0 Terminal Block 1 Designations Signal Analog Input 1 Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 Analog Input 3 poan ps Pe Pes Pa Analog Input 3 Description Isolated bipolar differential HOV 0 20mA or 4 20mA Important 0 20mA or 4 20mA operation requires that switch S9 S10 and S11 on the Control board be in the Off position Drive damage may occur if the switch is not in the correct position based on the type of input signal Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 Max 10V Max 0 25mA SE EDEN ENE DE VENN 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 r 14 15 16 17 18 19 20M zi 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Terminal Block 4 Terminal Block 2 Factory Default 1 Speed Ref A Config Parameter 70 Anlg In1 Sel 0 Off 75 Anlg In2 Sel 0 Off 80 Anlg In3 Sel 7 10V Pot Refe
61. Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 10000 0 32767 10 00 0 00 100 00 1 00 0 00 100 00 0 30 x Par 93 max 0 01 Based on drive current rating A RPM 0 30 x Par 94 na 0 01 Based on drive current rating A RPM x ms Read Only 0 00 100 00 Read Only 0 00 100 00 1000 1 32767 RPM 1000 1 32767 PRM Related 3 379 93 99 94 100 87 88 100 87 93 88 94 393 393 File SPEED COMMAND Group Speed Regulator e Enabled The output of the integral section of the speed regulator is set to zero when the speed reference and the speed feedback are equal to zero The component is enabled when a reference value is entered to restart acceleration e Disabled Disables the output of the integral section of the speed regulator Programming and Parameters 3 25 nol Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 103 Threshold Delay Default 100 393 Amount of time that must elapse before indication that the drive speed Min Max 0 65535 O is above the value set in Par 101 Speed Thresh Pos or below the Units ms value set in Par 102 Speed Thresh Neg 104 At Speed Error Default 100 394 Defines the speed above and below the
62. UserDefined2 User Defined 3 54 372 Spd Limit Active Diagnostics 3 46 506 UserDefined3 User Defined 3 54 373 Freeze Ramp Ramp Rates 3 29 507 UserDefined4 User Defined 3 54 374 Drv Fld Brdg Cur Motor Data 3 14 508 UserDefined5 User Defined 3 54 378 Trim Ramp Pct Speed Reference 3 24 509 UserDefined6 User Defined 3 54 379 Trim Speed Pct Speed Reference 3 24 510 UserDefined7 User Defined 3 54 381 Drive Status 1 Diagnostics 3 47 511 UserDefined8 User Defined 3 54 382 Drive Status 2 Diagnostics 3 47 512 UserDefined9 User Defined 3 54 384 Spd Ref Out Pct Speed Meters 3 11 513 UserDefined10 User Defined 3 54 3 78 Programming and Parameters No Parameter Name Group Page No Parameter Name Group Page 514 UserDefined11 User Defined 3 54 587 Reg Error Autotune 3 20 515 UserDefined12 User Defined 3 54 588 AC Line Freq Drive Data 3 13 516 UserDefined13 User Defined 3 54 589 DPI Baud Rate Comm Control 3 57 517 UserDefined14 User Defined 3 54 590 DPI Port Sel Comm Control 3 57
63. according to the values specified in the Fld Const xx Pct parameters With this curve is defined the result of Max Fld Curr Pct Field Ref Pct equals the percentage of field current according to the characteristic of the curve This field is Write Only After the value of this field is set to 0 it will automatically return to 1 Reset Fld Curve when set to 1 resets the drive to use a linear field curve When this parameter is set Par 280 Nom Mtr Fld Amps is linearly changed through Max Fld Curr Pct Field Ref Pct This field is Write Only After the value of this field is set to 1 it will automatically return to 0 Out Volt Level The percentage of maximum output voltage based on the value in Par 175 Rated Motor Volt This parameter allows you to change the output voltage at the motor end when the drive is in Field Weaken mode Typically set to the default value when the drive is in Field Weakening mode Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output or analog input Field Econ Delay Amount of time to elapse after the drive reaches zero speed as determined by Par 107 Speed Zero Level before field economy becomes active Current Limit Symmetrical current limit expressed as a percentage of the value in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps This value applies to both current directions for four quadrant drives e If Par 7 Current Limit is changed Pars 8 Current Lim Po
64. active compensation of the variable section as a percentage of the drive rated current Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters 0 00 0 00 100 00 1000 00 0 00 16000 00 ms 0 0 1000 ms 10 00 0 00 100 00 1 00 0 00 100 00 30 00 0 00 100 00 40 00 0 00 100 00 Based on drive current rating 0 10 Based on drive current rating A V Based on drive current rating 0 01 Based on drive current rating A V ms Speed Up Speed Up Inertia loss 0 O Read Only 0 00 200 00 Read Only 0 00 200 00 3 27 a a Related A al co 495 496 493 494 444 445 447 1012 1013 1014 1015 3 28 Programming and Parameters Dynamic Control File rme File Group Ramp Rates MOP Decel Time gei Parameter Name amp Description 3 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 18 Ramp Type Select Default 0 Linear Determines the type of ramp used Options 0 Linear e 0 Linear Linear ram
65. assigned to an analog output Arm Current Pct Armature current expressed as a percentage of the value in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Note This parameter is assigned to analog output 2 Terminals 23 and 24 Par 67 Anlg Out2 Sel by default but can be assigned to any analog output Arm Current Armature current in Amperes Fld Current Pct Field current present value as a percentage of Par 280 Nom Mtr Fld Amps Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Spd Reg Out Pct Output value of the speed regulator used as the reference for the current regulator Note By default this parameter is linked to Par 39 Torque Ref Field Current Present value of the field current The value of this parameter equals the value of Par 468 Min Fld Curr Pct when Par 499 Field Economy En 1 Enabled and Field Economy becomes active Field Ref Pct Field current reference as a percentage of Par 280 Nom Mtr Fld Amps Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Filt TorqCur Pct Percent filtered value of Par 199 Arm Current Pct Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Values Default Read Only Min Max 32766 Units RPM Default Read Only Min Max Par 45 Max Ref Speed Units RPM 1 The value of Max Ref Speed cannot exceed 8192 RPM Default Read Only Min Max 100 00 Units Default Read Only Min Max 32770 Units RPM Default
66. control circuits terminals U2 and V2 of the drive If any of the digital inputs are configured to Stop CF CF Clear Fault Enable or Aux Fault verify that signals are present or reconfigure Digital Inx Sel If a fault code appears refer to Chapter 4 Troubleshooting on page 4 1 2 Ifthe STS LED is not flashing green at this point refer to Drive Status Indicators below 0 You must use DriveExplorer v5 02 or higher or DriveTools SP v4 01 or higher with a PowerFlex DC drive specific software patch The patch can be downloaded from http www ab com support abdrives webupdate 2 4 Drive Start Up Figure 2 1 Drive Status Indicators e AI PORT O MOD O NETAO NETBO 00000 ODODOOD ODODODODO ODODOOD Goo 7 Po werFlex O Allen Bradley Name Color State Description O STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing A condition exists that is preventing the drive from Drive Stopped starting Check parameters 1403 Start Inhibits and or 1380 Drive Alarm 1 Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check parameter 1380 Drive Alarm 1 Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4 4 and or Alarm Descriptions on page 4 7 Steady A cont
67. descriptions Values 581 Dig Out Status Read Only Status of the standard digital outputs and relay outputs on the drive and on the optional I O Expansion circuit board if present Q l g ls e Je J Je y Jz S S 8 3 8 8 18 S 18 je 18 8 S 8 8 Y 383132380318 918 IE S S I 9 Y i o o o 0 0 2 2 2 2 D D D D j o obDbO ODEna Defaut 0 0 x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 112 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 629 Relay Out 2 Sel Ready Selects the source of the value that drives the N O relay between the terminals 75 and 76 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 68 Options 0 Not Used 8 Spd Limited 16 Encoder Err 24 ContactDB 1 SpdZero Th 9 Fault 17 Diam Calc 25 Contactor 2 Spd Thresh 10 Power Loss 18 Input Cmp 26 Alarm 3 At Speed 11 UserDefinedA 19 Diam Reached 27 Running 4 CurrentLimit 12 UserDefinedB 20 Speed Match 28 Jogging 5 Ready 13 Stop Control 21 Accelerating 29 Active 6 Ramp Pos 14 Field Loss 22 Decelerating 7 Ramp Neg 15 Spd Fbk Loss 23 Brake Cmd 1267 Inversion Out 1 Default 0 Disabled 1268 Inversion Out 2 EN Ji 1269 Inversion Out 3 Options P 1270 Inversion Out 4 nage 1271 Inversion Out 5 127
68. digital output MOP Inc Active Indicates whether or not the drive is accelerating using the preselected ramp e 0 No Accel the drive is not accelerating using a preselected ramp e 1 Accel the drive is accelerating using a preselected ramp MOP Dec Active Indicates whether the drive is decelerating using the preselected ramp e 0 No Decel The drive is not decelerating using a preselected ramp e 1 Decel The drive is decelerating using a preselected ramp Spd Select 0 Indicates the state of the assigned digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 17 Speed Sel 1 Refer to Option Definitions for Digital Inx Sel on page 3 65 for instructions on how to set digital input speed selects to different speed references e 0 Digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 17 Speed Sel 1 not asserted e 1 Digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 17 Speed Sel 1 asserted Note By default the state of this parameter is determined by digital input 5 Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Related 101 102 104 105 107 108 401 402 File No 401 402 403 1190 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbo
69. does not provide satisfactory results refer to Fine Tuning the Regulators on page C 22 The values determined by the Speed Regulator tuning tests are updated in Pars 87 Spd Reg Kp 88 Spd Reg Ki 1014 Inertia and 1015 Friction and displayed in the corresponding Pars 1032 Speed Tune Kp 1033 Speed Tune Ki 1030 Spd Tune Inertia and 1031 SpdTune Friction respectively The values of Pars 1030 1033 can be used as a record of the Speed Regulator auto tuning results if the values of Pars 87 88 1014 and 1015 are subsequently changed Verify Speed Reference Settings and Drive Operation Verify the following speed and direction for four quadrant drives references of the drive under a load motor shaft combined with the load All of the steps in the Drive Start Up procedure must have been completed before completing this step ATTENTION This test requires the free rotation of the Drive Start Up 2 15 1 Set the speed reference to 0 zero using the assigned source HIM or analog potentiometer Refer to Reference Control on page C 10 for more information on speed reference sources 2 View Par 385 Speed Ref Out and verify that the value is 0 3 Press the Start button on the HIM and slowly increase the speed reference until full speed is reached viewed in Par 385 Speed Ref Out 4 If using a four quadrant regenerative drive press the Direction button on the HIM and verify that t
70. elapse after the actual speed goes below Min Max 0 65535 i the value set in Par 107 Speed Zero Level before Par 395 At Zero Units ms Speed changes state 123 Spd Zero I En Default 0 Disable O O Enables Disables the output of the integral section of the speed Options 0 Disable regulator Used in the Zero Speed function 1 Enable 3 26 File SPEED COMMAND Group Speed Regulator Programming and Parameters No 124 125 126 242 348 388 444 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Spd Ref Zero En This parameter is only active when Par 125 Spd Zero P En 1 Enabled Used in the Zero Speed function e Enabled The proportional gain equal to Par 126 Spd Zero P Gain at zero speed is equal to Par 87 Spd Reg Kp when the speed reference is higher than the value defined in Par 106 Ref Zero Level e Disabled The proportional gain equal to Par 126 Spd Zero P Gain at zero speed is equal to the value in Par 87 Spd Reg Kp when the speed reference or the actual speed is higher than the value defined in Par 106 Ref Zero Level Spd Zero P En Enabled When both the speed reference value and the actual speed value 0 the proportional gain value in Par 126 Spd Zero P Gain is active after the delay time defined in Par 108 Speed Zero Delay Used in the Zero Speed function Disabled The s
71. function S1 For factory boot flashing only Leave set to the factory setting Jumper Off JumperOn Write firmware boot code Jumper Off Boot code on flash is protected S2 Not used Leave set to the factory setting Jumper Off 3 For factory boot flashing only Leave set to the factory setting Jumper Off Jumper On Reset Jumper Off Normal function e S4 Configures the input voltage of the DC analog tachometer 90V Refer to Table 1 N on page 1 30 for configuration S9 Configures the input signal of Analog Input 1 terminals 1 and 2 On Off Position 0 20mA 4 20mA On Position 0 10V 10V Note The input signal type must also be programmed accordingly using Par 71 Anlg Int Config S10 Configures the input signal of Analog Input 2 terminal 3 and 4 On Off Position 0 20 mA 4 20 mA On Position 0 10V 10V Note The input signal type must also be programmed accordingly using Par 76 Anlg In2 Config S11 Configures the input signal of Analog Input 3 terminals 5 and 6 On Off Position 0 20 mA 4 20 mA On Position 0 10V 10V Note The input signal type must also be programmed accordingly using Par 81 Anlg Ina Config O S12 Not used Leave set to the factory setting Off 14 Field current resistors setting see Table 1 H on page 1 21 Minimum a i field current Important In addition the value selected with switch S14 must be rating entered in Par 374 Drv Fld Brdg Cur in the control based on software when the drive is commissioned dr
72. information checks you must provide a hard wired maintained external operator accessible coast stop push button to disable the machine in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation can result if this is not done Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION Prior to running the motor direction and polarity checks uncouple the motor from equipment or processes that may be damaged by incorrect rotation of the motor or speed references ATTENTION Prior to running the motor direction and polarity 1 When checking motor polarity the drive will have power applied and the motor will rotate Verify that the motor is uncoupled from the load If the motor cannot be uncoupled from the load the following motor checks are recommended 3 All electrical connections are tight L The brushes are properly seated 4 The motor shaft is free to rotate 2 Access the Motor Control file Speed Feedback group and verify that Par 414 Fdbk Device Type is set to 3 Armature default 3 Access the Speed Command file Discrete Speeds group and verify that Par 266 Jog Speed is set to the default value 100 RPM or to an acceptable speed level for this test 2 10 Drive Start Up 4 If analog input 1 is wired access the Analog Inputs group and verify that the voltage level is OV in Par 1404 Analog In1 Value 5 While viewi
73. of a four quadrant drive Nom Mtr Fld Amps Rated motor nameplate field current lyen Drv Fld Brdg Cur Drive rated field bridge current lyrx The value in this field must be set equal to the value chosen with DIP switch 14 on the Control board refer to Table 1 H on page 1 21 for DIP switch configuration Fld Reg Kp Proportional gain Kp of the flux regulator expressed as a percentage of Par 97 Fld Reg Kp Base Fld Reg Ki Integral gain K of the flux regulator expressed as a percentage of Par 98 Fld Reg Ki Base Fld Reg Kp Base The proportional gain Kp of the field current regulator base value Fld Reg Ki Base Integral gain Kjo of the field current regulator in base value Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max 1750 1 16383 RPM 1750 00 1 00 6553 00 RPM 400 00 20 00 999 00 V Based on drive current rating 0 10 Based on drive current rating Off Off Or Par 374 Drv Fld Brdg Cur x 0 33 0 00 Drv Fld Brdg Cur A 1 00 0 50 80 00 A 2 00 0 00 100 00 O 1 00 0 00 100 00 3277 00 0 10 32770 00 3277 00 0 10 32770 00
74. possible overvoltage condition when the drive transitions to the field weakening mode 2 6 Drive Start Up 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Enter the rated motor nameplate armature current 280 Nom Mtr Fld Amps Enter the rated motor nameplate field current 374 Drv Fld Brdg Cur Enter the rated current of the field bridge regulator to match the value set using the DIP switch S14 Refer to Field Current Resistors on page 1 20 5 Access the Field Config group and configure the following parameters m If the motor field power is supplied by an external source set Par 497 Field Reg Enable 0 Disabled Otherwise verify that this parameter is set to 1 Enabled default If you are utilizing field economy when the drive is stopped or at zero speed set Par 1407 Field Econ Delay to the desired amount of time to elapse after the drive stops or reaches zero speed before field economy becomes active the value set in Par 468 Min Fld Curr Pct The default value is 300 seconds Par 469 Field Mode Sel select the desired field mode default 0 Base Speed constant field current O 1 Field Weaken field weakening mode O 2 External power to the field is supplied externally If you are utilizing field economy at zero speed set 468 Min Fld Curr Pct to the desired minimum field current for field economy default 30 If you are operating the drive in field weakening mode set Par
75. procedure STune FrictionLo 60 The friction value attained during Decrease the value of Par 1048 the auto tuning procedure is zero Autotune Cur Lim and repeat the or lower than the control auto tune procedure precision limit STune Timeout 61 The speed regulator auto tuning Verify the value in Par 1048 procedure did not complete Autotune Cur Lim If this value is within the available time set to low the motor will not be able to reach a maximum speed of 33 of the lower of the values in Par 45 Max Ref Speed or Par 3 Max Speed Fwd or Par 4 Max Speed Rev and not be able to complete the test Set these values appropriately and repeat the auto tuning procedure STune Aborted 62 The speed regulator auto tuning Informational only procedure has been stopped by the user 2 16 Drive Start Up For additional regulator fine tuning procedures refer to Fine Tuning the Regulators on page C 22 Speed Up Function Oscillation may occur during a speed change with loads presenting a high moment of inertia These oscillations can be reduced by enabling the Speed Up function Refer to Speed Up Function on page C 17 for more information Configuring the Speed Zero Logic The speed zero logic is factory set to 0 Disabled Refer to Speed Zero Function on page C 19 for more information Adaptive Speed Regulation The adaptive function of the speed regulator is factory set to 0 Disabled
76. set to 0 Disabled this parameter should be set to 0 Ignore Note Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of alarm and fault descriptions Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Read Only 0 32768 Read Only 0 000 134000000 000 hr Read Only 200 Read Only 32766 RPM Read Only 0 00 100 00 Read Only 999 00 Vdc 2 Fault 0 Ignore 1 Alarm 2 Fault 2 Fault 1 Alarm 2 Fault 3 Quick Stop 4 Normal Stop 5 CurrLim Stop 2 Fault 0 Ignore 1 Alarm 2 Fault 3 Quick Stop 4 Normal Stop 5 CurrLim Stop 2 Fault 0 Ignore 1 Alarm 2 Fault Related 497 File gt Group Alarms 478 481 584 1380 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Spd Loss Fit Cfg Default 2 Fault Determines the response of the drive to a speed feedback loss Options 1 Alarm condition F91 Encoder Loss 2 Faul Note Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of fault descriptions UnderVolt Thresh Default 230
77. settings 3 Press Enter Note A Params Defaulted F48 entry will be made in the drive s Fault Queue to indicate the change 7 Configure the Most Commonly Used Parameters If your application only requires basic drive parameter set up you can use the S M A R T list screen available on the HIM to program the drive Refer to Using the S M A R T List Screen on page B 2 for more information 1 At the Main menu scroll to the Parameter option and press Enter 2 Scroll to the FGP menu and press Enter 3 Scroll to the Motor Control file and press Enter 4 With the Motor Data group selected press Enter and configure the following parameters 1 45 Max Ref Speed Enter the motor nameplate base speed If the application requires field weakening to operate above base speed enter the maximum reference speed required 1 162 Max Feedback Spd Enter the motor nameplate base speed If the application requires field weakening to operate above base speed enter the maximum feedback speed that could be encountered UU 175 Rated Motor Volt Enter the rated motor nameplate armature voltage This value should be the measured armature voltage when the motor is running at base speed with rated field current This value should represent 100 of the rated armature voltage when field weakening is not used If field weakening is used this value should be set to 90 of the rated armature voltage to prevent a
78. shaft rotation direction via the Par 1029 Speed Tune Dir 1 Forward clockwise or 2 Reverse counter clockwise 2 Select the Par 1027 Spd Reg Autotune enter 1 and press Enter 2 14 Drive Start Up 12 3 Press the Start button on the HIM This will start the speed regulator auto tuning test which could take several minutes When the test has been completed the drive sill automatically stop During the test the following are completed 1 An acceleration test with the torque limit value set in the Par 1048 Autotune Cur Lim A deceleration test with a lower torque limit value applied until zero speed has been reached Y Par 1013 Torque Const is calculated and updated based on the entered motor data The test threshold speed is 33 of the lowest value set in the following Pars 1 45 Max Ref Speed 1 3 Max Speed Fwd or 4 Max Speed Rev based on the rotation direction chosen in Par 1029 Speed Tune Dir The drive will determine the speed loop gains Pars 87 Spd Reg Kp and 88 Spd Reg Ki based on the motor and load inertia and friction characteristics If any fault occur during the test refer to Auto Tuning Faults on page 2 15 for a description and more information Note If any manual adjustments are required due to vibrations etc these should be carried out according to the value of the integral gain Par 88 Spd Reg Ki If the speed regulator auto tuning test
79. top edge slide the cover down and off the chassis Figure 1 7 Frame A Lower Cover Removal Frame B and C Drives Loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the bottom cover Then slide the cover down until the screw heads line up with the key holes and lift the cover off the chassis Figure 1 8 Frame B amp C Drive Cover Removal Frame B Shown Line Reactors Filters Using Contactors Installation and Wiring 1 9 When connecting the drive directly to the main distribution system an AC line reactor must be used to guard against system disturbance The type of line reactor used depends upon the following the current absorbed by the AC input the AC input voltage the relative short circuit voltage the AC input frequency Refer to AC Input Line Reactors and AC Input Contactors on page A 16 for a list of recommended AC line reactors When using an AC input contactor the IEC AC1 rating of the contactor must be equal to the rated thermal RMS current value at the mains input of the drive The type of contactor used AC input or DC output contactor with or without a dynamic brake is configured as follows e When only a contactor is used Set parameter 1391 ContactorControl to Contactor default value Set one relay output and one digital input to Contactor default value for parameters 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel and 140
80. will have no control functions except for stop 0 Control Masked 1 Control Permitted x Reserved silo lo io o lo fo jo Jo lo PT eM le EEE EIE E EE EIES 5 B 5 5 S D o o o 0 o o o lolo A jA O 0 AQA S 8 8 g ls lg lols lole le alaka a a gt O E E E je je ie je er O O O AO O O Default x x x X Xx Xx Xx Xx x x 1 1 1 1 fo Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 592 Start Mask See Logic Mask O Controls which adapters can issue start commands 593 Jog Mask See Logic Mask Controls which adapters can issue jog commands 594 Direction Mask See Logic Mask O Controls which adapters can issue forward reverse direction commands 595 Reference Mask See Logic Mask Controls which adapters can select a manual reference 596 Accel Mask See Logic Mask 24 660 3 58 Programming and Parameters Lo a o o 3 S Parameter Name amp Description amp o Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 599 Local Mask See Logic Mask Controls which adapters are allowed to take exclusive control of drive logic commands except stop Exclusive local control can only be taken while the drive is stopped 600 Stop Owner The adapters that are presently issuing a valid stop command 0 No Command 1 Issuing Command x Reserved silo lo io 9 lo fo jo jo lo PT Oe NX 7 le SE EJES EEE EEG B B ES o ip io io o
81. 0 100 00 10 00 0 00 100 00 Disabled Disabled Enabled Read Only 0 10000 0 00 Par 785 PI Lower Limit Par 784 PI Upper Limit 0 00 Par 785 PI Lower Limit Par 784 PI Upper Limit 0 00 Par 785 PI Lower Limit Par 784 PI Upper Limit 3 33 amp Related 7 784 785 779 784 785 779 784 785 779 784 785 779 3 34 File APPLICATIONS Group PI Control Programming and Parameters No 779 780 781 784 785 793 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PI Central v sel Selects one of the four possible initial output values of the PID regulator integral component corresponding to the initial diameter of the PI block e 0 When the PI block is disabled Par 769 Enable PI Disabled the last value of the integral component calculated corresponding to swift diameter is stored in Par 771 PI Output This value is used by the PID regulator when the PI block is enabled again and the drive is restarted This function is useful when for any reason the drive must be turned off or if incoming power is removed from the drive e 2 or 3 When the PI block is disabled Par 769 Enable PI Disabled the value of PI Output will be set to the value of the selected parameter 1 776 PI Central vi 2 777 PI Central v2 or
82. 0 0 eee eee eee eee 1 1 Minimum Mounting Clearances 0 0 eee ee eee eens 1 2 Mounting Dimensions and Weights 0 0 0 eee eee eee eens 1 2 Lifting PowerFlex DC Drives 0 0 cece eee nee ees 1 5 Mounting Frame C Drives 0 0 ccc eee eens 1 6 Removing the Drive Covers 0 0 cece ene e E ALE SAA 1 7 Frame A DIVER ee hee ae 1 7 Frame Band C Drives 0 0 cece cee renere navne 1 8 Line Reactors Filters esc cima Gee eed Fem eed ees heey dnd des 1 9 Using COntactorsuz aa asset ous ee Ree A ee eet eh a Phas te 1 9 AC Input Contactors ciecie ieee ccc ee cece een eens 1 10 DE Output Contactors nse Ae eae ea ee ata a E 1 10 Dynamic Brake Resistors 0 0 cece ccc eee e cnet ene 1 10 Control Power Protection asvvuvanavava vannene eee eens 1 10 General Grounding Requirements 0 0 cece eee eee eee ran 1 11 Safety Ground PE Acetone Vee ene eeu ean GAME he See ane 1 11 Power Feedin sian ees ceras staal pte mie wate ow Gea heal ae ea feen 1 12 Encoder Ground Connections 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee eens 1 12 Tachometer Ground Connections 0 essre eruere 1 12 Power Circuit Protection 0 0 cece cee eee vener reven 1 12 Power Wiring 4 fot dirk Wee et Pe a ee Mie Ad ee lh Bee 1 12 AC Input Voltages use nseksadhese nahen bbe here e se Be het Sod he 1 12 DCE Output Voltages riencia eel ee es neser aa es eae e 1 13 Typical Power Wiring Diagrams
83. 019 OFF OFF JON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 027 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 035 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 045 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 052 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF JON OFF 073 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 086 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF JON OFF 100 ON ON OFF JON OFF OFF JON OFF 129 OFF OFF JON ON OFF OFF JON OFF B 167 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF JON OFF 207 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF JON OFF 250 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF JON OFF 330 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 412 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF C 495 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 667 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF I O Signal and Control Wiring Eight 8 digital inputs four 4 digital outputs three 3 analog inputs and two 2 analog outputs are available on the standard I O terminal blocks provided with the drive One digital input 1 8 must be configured for Enable Additional digital and analog I O is available when using the optional I O Expansion circuit board Refer to Appendix F Optional Analog and Digital I O Expansion Circuit Board for more information Also you can use the optional 115V AC Converter circuit board to convert 115V AC digital input signals to 24V DC digital inputs signals to interface with the digital inputs on the standard I O terminal blocks Refer to Appendix G Optional 115V AC to 24V DC I O Converter Circuit Board for more information Table 1 9 Recommended Signal Wire Size for Analog I O Digital I O and DC Analog Wire
84. 1286 Winder Functions 3 44 Scale6 In Max 1249 Scale Blocks 3 38 Ref Spd Source 1284 Winder Functions 44 Scale6 In Min 1250 Scale Blocks 3 38 Ref Speed Gain 1285 Winder Functions 3 44 Scale6 In Off 1251 Scale Blocks 3 39 Ref Zero Level 106 Speed Regulator 3 25 Scale6 Input 1246 Scale Blocks 3 38 Reference Mask 595 Masks 8 Owners 3 57 Scale6 Mul 1247 Scale Blocks 3 38 Reference Owner 604 Masks 8 Owners 3 58 Scale6 Out Off 1252 Scale Blocks 3 39 Relay Out 1 Sel 1392 Digital Outputs 3 69 Scale6 Output 1245 Scale Blocks 3 38 Relay Out 2 Sel 629 Digital Outputs 3 69 Set Fld Curve 919 Field Config 3 16 Reset Defaults 258 Drive Memory 3 45 Software Version 331 Configuration 3 13 Reset Fld Curve 920 Field Config 3 16 Spd 0 Trip Delay 627 Stop Modes 3 30 Roll Diameter 1154 Diameter Calc 40 Spd Draw Out Pct 1019 Speed Meters 3 12 S Curve Accel 1 665 Ramp Rates 3 29 Spd Fdbk Control 457 Speed Feedback 3 19 S Curve Accel 2 667 Ramp Rates 3 29 Spd Fdbk Error 455 Speed Feedback 3 19 S Curve Decel 1 666 Ramp Rates 29 Spd Fdbk Filter 444 Speed Regulator 3 26 S Curve Decel 2 668 Ramp Rates 3 29 Spd Feedback 122 Speed Meters 3 11 S Curve Time 19 Ramp Rates 3 28 Spd Feedback Pct 121 Speed Meters 3 11 Save HIM Ref 209 HIM Ref Config 45 Spd Limit Active 372 Diagnostics 3 46 Save MOP Ref 249 Reference Config 3 45 Spd Loss Fit Cfg 478 Alarms 3 53 Scale1 Div 487 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Match Acc 1196 Winder Function
85. 157 1158 1159 1160 1162 1163 1164 1165 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Max Diameter Maximum roll diameter Roll Diameter Displays the calculated roll diameter Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output as a percentage of Par 1153 Max Diameter Line Spd Thresh Line speed detecting threshold When the value of Par 1286 Ref Line Speed is lower than the value of Line Spd Thresh the diameter calculation stops and the diameter is kept at a constant value When the value of Ref Line Speed overcomes the threshold the diameter calculation is enabled with an initial filter corresponding to the value in Par 1206 Diam init filter for the time set in Par 1207 Diam stdy delay At the end of this time the filter will be set to the value of Par 1162 Diameter Filter Line Spd Gain Calibration value used to obtain Par 1160 Line Speed Pct 100 at its maximum value The value of this parameter depends on the value of Par 1284 Ref Spd Source Line Spd Gain 32768 x 16384 maximum value of Ref Spd Source x 8 1 Diameter Reset Diameter reset When this parameter is set to 1 the diameter starting value is set to the value in Par 1168 Diam Preset Sel Diam Threshold Diameter threshold as a percentage of Par 1153 Max Diameter Par 1159 Diameter Reached is set to 1 when the value in this parameter is exceeded
86. 2 Inversion Out 6 1273 Inversion Out 7 1274 Inversion Out 8 O Reverses the digital output signal 1275 Inversion Relay2 Default 0 Disabled O Inverts the signal for Relay Output 2 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel Default 25 Contactor od Selects the source of the value that drives the N O relay between the terminals 35 and 36 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 68 Options 0 Not Used 8 Spd Limited 16 Encoder Err 24 ContactDB 1 SpdZero Th 9 Fault 17 Diam Calc 25 Contactor 2 Spd Thresh 10 Power Loss 18 Input Cmp 26 Alarm 3 At Speed 11 UserDefinedA 19 Diam Reached 27 Running 4 CurrentLimit 12 UserDefinedB 20 Speed Match 28 Jogging 5 Ready 13 Stop Control 21 Accelerating 29 Active 6 Ramp Pos 14 Field Loss 22 Decelerating 7 Ramp Neg 15 Spd Fbk Loss 23 Brake Cmd 1393 Inversion Relay1 Disabled O Inverts the signal for Relay Output 1 Disabled Enabled 3 70 Group DPI Inputs Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions DPI P1 Select Sel ects the destination of the reference value from DPI Port 1 DPI P2 Select
87. 481 OverVolt Fit Cfg 203 FldLoss Fit Cfg 473 OverCurrent Thr 584 Aux Inp Fit Cfg 354 Spd Loss Fit Cfg 478 User Defined UsrDsplyMult0 50 UserDefined14 517 UsrDefBitWrdA15 535 UsrDsplyDiv0 51 UserDefined15 518 UsrDefBitWrdB 536 UsrValMult1 53 UsrDefBitWrdA 519 UsrDefBitWrdB0 537 UsrValDiv1 54 UsrDefBitWrdA0 520 UsrDefBitWrdB1 538 UserDefined0 503 UsrDefBitWrdA1 521 UsrDefBitWrdB2 539 UserDefined1 504 UsrDefBitWrdA2 522 UsrDefBitWrdB3 540 UserDefined2 505 UsrDefBitWrdA3 523 UsrDefBitWrdB4 541 UserDefined3 506 UsrDefBitWrdA4 524 UsrDefBitWrdB5 542 UserDefined4 507 UsrDefBitWrdA5 525 UsrDefBitWrdB6 543 UserDefined5 508 UsrDefBitWrdA6 526 UsrDefBitWrdB7 544 UserDefined6 509 UsrDetBitWrdA7 527 UsrDefBitWrdB8 545 UserDefined7 510 UsrDefBitWrdA8 528 UsrDefBitWrdB9 546 UserDefined8 511 UsrDefBitWrdA9 529 UsrDefBitWrdB10 547 UserDefined9 512 UsrDefBitWrdA10 530 UsrDefBitWrdB11 548 UserDefined10 513 UsrDefBitWrdA11 531 UsrDefBitWrdB12 549 UserDefined1 1 514 UsrDefBitWrdA12 532 UsrDefBitWrdB13 550 UserDefined12 515 UsrDefBitWrdA13 533 UsrDefBitWrdB14 551 UserDefined13 516 UsrDefBitWrdA14 534 UsrDefBitWrdB15 552 Communications Comm Control DPI Baud Rate 589 DPI Fdbk Select 1321 DPI Port Value 1343 men DPI Port Sel 590 a Masks amp Owners Logic Mask 591 MOP Mask 598 Reference Owner 604 Start Mask 592 Local Mask 599 Accel Owner 605 Jog Mask 593 Decel Mask 631 Fa
88. 56 Diam Preset 1 1165 Max Deviation 796 Diameter Reset 1157 Diam Preset 2 1166 Gear Box Ratio 797 Diam Threshold 1158 Diam Preset 3 1167 Dancer Constant 798 Diameter Reached 1159 Diam Preset Sel 1168 Minimum Diameter 799 Line Speed Pct 1160 Diam Inc DecEn 1205 Diameter Calc St 800 Diam Calc Dis 1161 Diam init filter 1206 Max Diameter 1153 Diameter Filter 1162 Diam stdy delay 1207 Roll Diameter 1154 Base Omega 1163 Winder Functions Variable J Comp 1171 Line FastStp Pct 1186 Torque Winder En 1209 Constant J Comp 1172 Winder Type 1187 W Target 1210 Mater Width Pct 1173 Torq Current Pct 1193 Actual Comp 1213 Static Friction 1174 Act Ten Ref Pct 1194 Closed Loop En 1214 Dynamic Friction 1175 Speed Match 1195 Speed Demand En 1215 Taper Enable 1176 Spd Match Acc 1196 Spd match torque 1216 Initial Diameter 1177 Spd Match Dec 1197 W Reference 1217 Final Diameter 1178 Offs Accel Time 1198 Jog TW Speed 1255 Tension Reduct 1179 W Offset 1199 Jog TW Enable 1256 Tension Ref 1180 Spd Match Gain 1200 Ref Spd Source 1284 Tension Scale 1181 Winder Side 1201 Ref Speed Gain 1285 Time AccDec Min 1182 W Gain 1202 Ref Line Speed 1286 Int Acc Calc En 1183 Spd Match Compl 1203 Static F Zero 1287 Line Accel Pct 1184 Line Spd Source 1204 Line Decel Pct 1185 Close Loop Comp 1208 Programming and Parameters 3 9
89. 6 608 Local Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 587 UsrDefBitWrdBO User Defined 3 56 609 Decel Owner Masks amp Owners 3 58 538 UsrDefBitWrdB1 User Defined 356 610 Data In A1 Datalinks 3 59 539 UsrDefBitWrdB2 User Defined 356 611 Data In A2 Datalinks 359 540 UsrDefBitWrdB3 User Defined 356 612 _ Data In B1 Datalinks 3 59 541 UsrDefBitWrdB4 User Defined 3 56 6185 1 Data in Be Datalinks 359 542 UsrDefBitWrdBS User Defined 3 56 614 DatalnCi Datalinks 3 59 543 UsrDefBitWrdBe User Defined 356 615 Data Inca Datalinks 359 544 UsrDefBitWrdB7 User Defined 355 616 Data In D1 Datalinks 359 545 UsrDefBitWrdB8 User Defined 3 56 617 _ Data In D2 Datalinks 3 59 546 UsrDefBitWrdB9 User Defined 3 56 618 Data Out Al Datalinks 3 59 547 UsrDefBitWrdB10 User Defined 3 56 618 Dala Out Ae Datalinks 359 548 UsrDefBitWrdB11 User Defined 3 56 620 Data Out Bi Datalinks 3 59 549 UsrDefBitWrdB12 User Defined 3 56 col Date Ques Datalinks 359 550 UsrDefBiiWrdB13 User Defined 355 622 Data Out C1 Datalinks 359 551 UsrDefBitWrdB14 User Defined 3 56 623 Data Out C2 Datalinks 3 59 552 UsrDefBitWrdB15 User Defined 356 624 Data Out D1 Datalinks 3 59 553 Scale2 Input Scale Blocks 3 38 625 Data Out D2 Datalinks 3 59 554 Scale2 Output Scale Blocks 3 38 627 Spd 0 Trip Delay Stop Modes 3 30 565 Scale2 Mul Scale Blocks 338 629 Relay Out 2 Sel Digital Outputs 3 69 556 Scale2 Div Scale Blocks 3 38 631 Decel Mask Ma
90. 622 Data In A2 611 Data In D2 617 Data Out C1 623 Data In B1 612 Data Out A1 618 Data Out D1 624 Data In B2 613 Data Out A2 619 Data Out D2 625 Data In C1 614 Data Out B1 620 Data In Val Sel 1319 Data In C2 615 Data Out B2 621 Data In SelData 1320 Input Output Analog Inputs Anlg In1 Sel 70 Anlg In1 Target 295 Anlg Int Cmp Eq 1045 Anlg In1 Config 71 Anlg In2 Target 296 Analog In1 Value 1404 Anlg In2 Sel 75 Anlg In3 Target 297 Analog In2 Value 1405 Anlg In2 Config 76 Anlg In1 Cmp 1042 Analog In3 Value 1406 Anlg In3 Sel 80 Anlg Ini Cmp Err 1043 Anlg In3 Config 81 Anlg Ini Cmp Dly 1044 Analog Outputs Anlg Out1 Sel 66 Anlg Out4 Sel 69 Analog Out3 Scale 64 Anlg Out2 Sel 67 Analog Out1 Scale 62 Analog Out4 Scale 65 Anlg Out3 Sel 68 Analog Out2 Scale 63 Digital Inputs Dig In Status 564 Digital In9 Sel 141 Dig In Term 6 570 Digital In1 Sel 133 Digital In10 Sel 142 Dig In Term 7 571 Digital In2 Sel 134 Digital In11 Sel 143 Dig In Term 8 572 Digital In3 Sel 135 Digital In12 Sel 144 Dig In Term 9 573 Digital In4 Sel 136 Dig In Term 1 565 Dig In Term 10 574 Digital In5 Sel 137 Dig In Term 2 566 Dig In Term 11 575 Digital In6 Sel 138 Dig In Term 3 567 Dig In Term 12 576 Digital In7 Sel 139 Dig In Term 4 568 Digital In8 Sel 140 Dig In Term 5 569 Digital Outputs Dig Out Status 581 Digital Out4 Sel 148 Digital Out8 Sel 152 Digital Out1 Sel 145 Digital Out5 Sel
91. 9 26 27 20 20 NON av 34 2 34 34 34 37 da 19 40 DEBUG ERA OMT gp py a 4 PS ea Gr Installation and Wiring 1 25 Figure 1 25 Frame C Control Circuit Terminal Block Location A DANGER RISK_OF ELECTRIC AO DISCONNECT INPUT POWER BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT ff ADDO 35 36 75 76 7 H U2 V2 PE Table 1 K Control Circuit Wire Sizes Drive Current Rating Flexible Multi core Code Wire Size Wire Size Tightening Torque Frame 230V Terminals mm mn N m Ibs in All 0 5 4 4 1 Refer to Catalog Number Explanation on page Preface 4 positions 8 10 for corresponding drive HP rating armature amp rating and field amp rating Figure 1 26 SA SB Terminal Block Location on Frame B Drives The SA SB terminal block is located at the top of the drive Front of drive t 1 26 Installation and Wiring Figure 1 27 SA SB Terminal Block Location on Frame C Drives The SA SB terminal block is located on the Switching Power Supply circuit board on the back of the Control EMI Shield Switching Power Supply board SA SB terminals Back of Control EMI shield XSW connector To access the SA SB terminal block 1 Remove the top protective cover from the drive 2 Disconnect cables XFCD and XR 3 Loosen captive EG SCrews 3 Loosen captive screws 4 Lower EMI shield and disconnect cable XSW from Switching Power Supply board see above Frame
92. 94 Speed Regulator 27 Accel Status 1188 Diagnostics 3 49 Arm Volt Ki Base 496 Speed Regulator 3 27 Accel Time 1 660 Ramp Rates 3 29 Arm Volt Kp 493 Speed Regulator 3 27 Accel Time 2 24 Ramp Rates 3 28 Arm Volt Kp Base 495 Speed Regulator 27 Act Spd Filter 923 Speed Feedback 3 20 At Speed 394 Diagnostics 3 48 Act Ten Ref Pct 1194 Winder Functions 3 42 At Speed Delay 105 Speed Regulator 3 25 Actual Comp 1213 Winder Functions 3 43 At Speed Error 104 Speed Regulator 25 Actual Speed 924 Speed Meters 3 12 At Zero Speed 395 Diagnostics 3 48 Actuator Delay 1266 Stop Modes 3 31 Autotune Cur Lim 1048 Auto Tune 3 21 Adaptive Gain1 189 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 Aux Inp Fit Cfg 354 Alarms 3 52 Adaptive Gain2 191 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 Base Omega 1163 Diameter Calc 3 40 Adaptive Gain3 193 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 Clear Fault Que 263 Faults 3 51 Adaptive Joint 1 186 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 Close Loop Comp 1208 Winder Functions 3 43 Adaptive Joint 2 187 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 Closed Loop En 1214 Winder Functions 3 43 Adaptive P Gain1 188 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 Closing Speed 1262 Stop Modes 3 31 Adaptive P Gain2 190 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 Constant J Comp 1172 Winder Functions 41 Adaptive P Gain3 192 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 ContactorControl 1391 Digital Inputs 3 66 Adaptive Ref 183 Adaptv Regulator 3 31 Cur Lim Neg Out 11 Current Meters 3 12 Adaptive Reg Typ 182 Adaptv Regulator 3 31 Cur Lim Pos Out 10 Current Meters 12
93. AC input and DC output for four quadrant drives only sides Internally mounted fuses for armature converter protection are provided with 230V 521A and 460V 495A and 667A frame C PowerFlex DC drives Refer to Drive Power Circuit Protection on page A 7 for a list of replacement fuses and general fuse locations AC Input Voltages PowerFlex DC drives are rated for the following AC input voltages Armature Circuit Field Circuit Control Circuit Terminals U V W Terminals U1 V1 Terminals U2 V2 230V 10 3Ph 230V 10 1Ph 115V 15 1 Ph 400V 10 3Ph 400V 10 1Ph or 440V 10 3Ph 460V 10 1Ph 230V 15 1Ph 460V 10 3Ph 50 60 Hz 5 50 60 Hz 5 480V 10 3Ph 50 60 Hz 5 1 For frame B and C drives only a jumper must be placed between terminals SA SB on the Switching Power Supply circuit board for the control circuits to work with 115V AC input Refer to Figure 1 26 on page 1 25 for terminal block location on frame B drives and Figure 1 27 on page 1 26 for terminal block location on frame C drives Installation and Wiring 1 13 DC Output Voltages The output voltages below take into account an AC input undervoltage within the stated tolerance limits and a voltage drop of 4 due to an AC input line reactor It is the same as the rated armature voltage suggested for the connected motor Armature Circuit AC Input Voltage DC Output Armature Voltage Termin
94. Adaptive Spd 1 184 Adaptv Regulator 3 31 Current Lim Neg 9 Torque Attribute 3 16 Adaptive Spd 2 185 Adaptv Regulator 3 31 Current Lim Pos 8 Torque Attribute 3 16 Adaptive Spd En 181 Adaptv Regulator 3 31 Current Limit 7 Torque Attribute 3 16 Analog Int Value 1404 Analog Inputs 3 63 Current Reg In 41 Current Meters 3 12 Analog In2 Value 1405 Analog Inputs 3 63 CurrLimit Active 349 Diagnostics 3 46 Analog In3 Value 1406 Analog Inputs 63 CurrReg Autotune 452 Autotune 21 Anlg In 1 Filter 792 Analog Inputs 3 62 Dancer Constant 798 Diameter Calc 3 39 Anlg Int Cmp 1042 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data In A1 610 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In1 Cmp Dly 1044 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data In A2 611 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg Int Cmp Eq 1045 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data In B1 612 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg Int Cmp Err 1043 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data In B2 613 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg Int Config 71 Analog Inputs 3 61 Data In C1 614 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg Int Offse 74 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data In C2 615 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg Int Scale 72 Analog Inputs 3 61 Data In D1 616 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In1 Sel 70 Analog Inputs 3 61 Data In D2 617 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In1 Targe 295 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data In SelData 1320 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg Int Tune 259 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data In Val Sel 1319 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In2 Config 76 Analog Inputs 3 61 Data Out A1 618 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In2 Offset 79 Analog Inputs 3 62 Data Out A2 619 Datalinks 3 59 Anlg In2 Scale 77 Analog Inputs 3 61 Data Out B1 620 Datalinks 3
95. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 110 9 8 7 6 5 4 B 2 1 0 1322 Direction Mode Default 0 Unipolar 0 Selects the method that will be used for changing direction Options 0 Unipolar e Unipolar Drive Logic determines the direction i io e Bipolar The sign of the reference determines the direction 7 e Rev Disable Forward direction only not changeable 1375 MOP Select Default 0 of Selects the destination of the MOP signal Options 0 of 1 Speed Ref A 2 Speed Ref B 3 Trim Speed 4 TB Man Ref 211 Param Access Lvl Default 0 Basic gt Selects the parameter display level Options 0 Basic 2 e Basic Reduced parameter set 1 Advanced o e Advanced Full parameter set 1258 Reset Defaults Default 0 Ready O Sting this parameter to 1 Factory will load the default settings in Options 0 Ready the drive firmware 1 Factory 3 45 Related 3 46 Programming and Parameters S z 346 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Torque Positive Indicates whether the drive is operating with a positive torque reference e 1 Active The drive is operating with a positive torque reference The motor is accelerating in the forward direction or decelerating in the negative direction and Par 20 Ramp Delay has timed out e 0
96. C Heatsink Cooling Fans and Internal Fuse Signal Terminals Frame C drives require an external power supply for the heatsink cooling fans and include internal armature circuit protection fuses drives rated 521A 230V AC and 495A and 667A 460V AC input only The terminals for the internal fuses can be used to indicate that the fuses have opened Table 1 L Heatsink Cooling Fans and Fuses Terminal Designations Maximum Voltage 230V AC Terminal Description Maximum Current Single phase input power for cooling fans gt Internal fuse signal 250V AC 1A Installation and Wiring 1 27 Figure 1 28 Frame C Heatsink Cooling Fan and Internal Fuse Signal Terminal Block Locations A DANGER RISK OF ELECTRIC PE DISCONNECT INPUT POWER BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT 7 SOOO NY OE 82 35 36 75 76 7 U2 V2 PE I O Wiring Observe the following points when installing I O wiring e Use copper wire only e Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended Important I O terminals labeled or Common are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise operation and driving it from a voltage source could cause component damage Verify proper switch configuration prior to applying input signals Refer to DIP Switch and Jumper Settings on page 1 28 ATTENTION Configuring an analog input fo
97. Clear Fault Que Faults 3 51 484 Scale1 Input Scale Blocks 3 38 266 Jog Speed Discrete Speeds 3 23 485 Scale1 Output Scale Blocks 3 38 267 TB Manual Ref Discrete Speeds 3 23 486 Scale1 Mul Scale Blocks 3 38 280 Nom Mtr Fld Amps Motor Data 3 14 487 Scale1 Div Scale Blocks 3 38 295 Anlg Int Target Analog Inputs 3 62 488 Scalet In Max Scale Blocks 3 38 296 Anlg In2 Target Analog Inputs 3 62 489 Scale1 In Min Scale Blocks 3 38 297 Anlg In3 Target Analog Inputs 3 62 490 Scalet In Off Scale Blocks 3 39 300 Drive Type Drive Data 3 13 491 Scale1 Out Off Scale Blocks 3 39 331 Software Version Configuration 3 13 492 Scale1 In Abs Scale Blocks 3 39 342 Torque Reduction Torque Attribute 3 17 493 Arm Volt Kp Speed Regulator 3 27 344 Zero Ramp Output Ramp Rates 3 29 494 Arm Volt Ki Speed Regulator 3 27 345 Zero Ramp Input Ramp Rates 3 29 495 Arm Volt Kp Base Speed Regulator 3 27 346 Torque Positive Diagnostics 3 46 496 Arm Volt Ki Base Speed Regulator 3 27 347 Torque Negative Diagnostics 3 46 497 Field Reg Enable Field Config 3 15 348 Lock Speed Integ Speed Regulator 3 26 498 Force Min Field Field Config 3 15 349 CurrLimit Active Diagnostics 3 46 499 Field Economy En Field Config 3 15 351 Field Current Current Meters 3 12 500 Field Ref Pct Current Meters 3 12 353 Zero Torque Torque Attribute 3 17 503 UserDefinedO User Defined 3 54 354 Aux Inp Fit Cfg Alarms 3 52 504 UserDefined1 User Defined 3 54 365 OverTemp Fit Cfg Alarms 3 52 505
98. Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Options Programming and Parameters 1024 00 100 00 32770 00 Armature Encoder DC Tach Armature on Oo 22 0 100 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ATTENTION If speed feedback control is disabled Par 457 Spd Fdbk Control set to 0 Disabled and Par 414 Device Type is set to 1 Encoder the motor could run at excessive speed or become damaged which could result in personal injury or destruction of equipment 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 00 0 90 3 00 0 00 20 00 RPM 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 19 3 Related 455 478 457 3 20 File MOTOR CONTROL Group Speed Feedback Autotune Programming and Parameters D ao Parameter Name Description 5 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 911 Z Channel Enable Default 0 Disabled Determines whether the encoder zero pulse qualification signal Options 0 Disabled or zero cam will be read by the drive This parameter is used 1 Enabled for systems implementing position control e Enabled The encoder zero pulse is read e Disabled The encoder zero pulse is not read 912 Z Capture Pos En Default 0 C
99. Digital In8 Sel e When an AC or DC contactor and dynamic brake contactor are used Set parameter 1391 ContactorControl to Contactor DB Set one relay output parameter 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel or parameter 629 Relay Out 2 Sel to Contactor and the other relay output to ContactorDB Set one digital input to Contactor default value for parameter 140 Digital In8 Sel e When a contactor is NOT used Set parameter 1391 ContactorControl to None Do NOT set either relay output to Contactor or ContactorDB Do NOT set any digital input to Contactor Because any relay output can be configured as a contactor or dynamic brake control and any digital input as contactor status care must be taken to correctly wire the terminal blocks to match the parameter selections Refer to Relay Outputs on page 1 21 and I O Signal and Control Wiring on page 1 31 for wiring information 1 10 Installation and Wiring Control Power Protection AC Input Contactors Refer to AC Input Line Reactors and AC Input Contactors on page A 16 for a list of recommended AC input contactors DC Output Contactors A DC output contactor can be used to connect the output of the armature circuit to the DC motor If a DC output contactor is used an AC input contactor is not needed Refer to DC Output Contactors and Dynamic Brake Resistor Kits on page A 18 for a list of recommended DC output cont
100. E eE T 3 13 13 3 13 13 3 13 8 a ja ja gt L Z Z Z Z Z z z a A ala ja j Defaut 0 x x Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx x 1 1 41 41 11 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 59 Related 1320 1319 E O fr 3 60 Programming and Parameters nol a ao 3 Parameter Name amp Description T 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 1377 Write Mask Act Read Only 1378 The status of write access for the DPI ports When bit 15 is set network security is controlling the write mask instead of Par 1378 Write Mask Cfg 0 Read Only 1 Write Permitted x Reserved F oO IN o OD Je e 501 0 Im Jey Jw Mia 8 5 5 5 5 5 5 S 5 15 5 5 15 5 IS S ja A ja ja EE GE fa jo ja ja js 353 1553 35 3 55 8 1 0 1 0 gt IL LX Z Z z z z CODOOOGIO Defaut 0 x x xk x x x Xx Xx x 1 1 FAO 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1378 Write Mask Cfg 1377 Enables Disables parameter write access for the DPI ports Masking of the Port that is writing to this parameter is 72 prohibited 0 Read Only 1 Write Permitted x Reserved E ES io a Jo 2 E gle ede le e e e e le e ele e e g E 5 E E 212 2 8 8 18 152 8 amp 2 3 8 5 1515 13 5 15 515 a la a amp gt 5 rm IX Z Z elie z CODOOOGIO o Default 0 x x Xx xXx Xx Xx x x kx 1
101. Frequenc TstGen Frequency Output frequency of the test generator TstGen Amplitude Amplitude of the delta signal produced by the test generator TstGen Offset Offset of the test generator Values Default Options NotConnected NotConnected Reserved Torq Cur Ref Field Ref Ramp Ref Speed Ref NRXRON 0 O a P60 TstGen Amplitude Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units P61 TstGen Offset 0 10 0 10 62 50 Hz 0 00 0 00 200 00 0 00 200 00 Related 59 60 61 58 58 58 Speed Command File File SPEED COMMAND Group Limits Discrete Speeds No 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 266 267 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Minimum Speed Defines the minimum speed of the drive This value applies to both directions of motor rotation for four quadrant drives speed below the value set in Minimum Speed is not possible regardless of the set speed reference value If the value of Minimum Speed is changed Pars 5 Min Speed Fwd and 6 Min Speed Rev are set to the same value If either Par 5 Min Speed Fwd or Par 6 Min Speed Rev is changed later the last change is valid Maximum Speed Defines the maximum speed of the drive This value applies to both directions of motor r
102. Functions 3 42 UsrDefBitWrdB12 549 User Defined 3 56 orq Current Pct 1193 Winder Functions 3 42 UsrDefBitWrdB13 550 User Defined 3 56 orq Limit Type 715 Load Limits 3 30 UsrDefBitWrdB14 551 User Defined 3 56 orq Red CurLim 13 Load Limits 3 30 UsrDefBitWrdB15 552 User Defined 3 56 orque Const 1013 Autotune 3 20 UsrDefBitWrdB2 539 User Defined 3 56 orque Negative 347 Diagnostics 3 46 UsrDefBitWrdB3 540 User Defined 3 56 orque Positive 346 Diagnostics 3 46 UsrDefBitWrdB4 541 User Defined 3 56 orque Reduction 342 Torque Attribute 3 17 UsrDefBitWrdB5 542 User Defined 3 56 orque Ref 39 Torque Attribute 3 17 UsrDefBitWrdB6 543 User Defined 3 56 orque Winder En 1209 Winder Functions 3 43 UsrDefBitWrdB7 544 User Defined 3 56 tim Ramp 42 Speed Reference 3 24 UsrDefBitWrdB8 545 User Defined 3 56 tim Ramp Pct 378 Speed Reference 3 24 UsrDefBitWrdB9 546 User Defined 3 56 tim Speed 43 Speed Reference 3 24 UsrDsplyDivO 51 User Defined 3 53 tim Speed Pet 379 Speed Reference 3 24 UsrDsplyMulto 50 User Defined 3 53 rim Torque 40 forque Attribute 3 17 UsrValDiv1 54 User Defined 3 53 tqTpr_Enable 750 forque Attribute 3 18 UsrValMult1 53 User Defined 3 53 tqTpr_Limo 751 forque Attribute 3 18 Variable J Comp 1171 Winder Functions 3 41 tqTpr_Lim1 752 forque Attribute 3 18 W Gain 1202 Winder Functions 3 43 rqTpr_Lim2 753 forque Attribute 3 18 W Offset 1199 Winder Functions 3 43 tqTpr_Lim3 754 forque Attribute 3 18 W Reference 1217 Winder Functions 3 44 tqT
103. I P2 Select 1324 DPI P4 Select 1326 File MONITOR Group Speed Meters 110 111 113 114 117 118 121 122 384 385 420 Monitor File Parameter Name Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Speed Ref A First speed reference for the drive Negative values apply to four quadrant drives only Note This parameter is assigned to analog input 1 terminals 1 amp 2 Par 70 Anlg In1 Sel by default but can be assigned to any analog input Speed Ref A Pct First speed reference for the drive as a percentage of the value defined in Par 45 Max Ref Speed Speed Ref B Second speed reference for the drive Negative values apply to four quadrant drives only Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input Speed Ref B Pct The second speed reference for the drive as a percentage of the value defined in Par 45 Max Ref Speed Ramp In Total reference value input to the ramp in RPM Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Ramp In Pct Total reference value input to the ramp as a percentage of Par 45 Max Ref Speed Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Ramp Out Output of the ramp in RPM Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Ramp Out Pct Output of the ramp as a percentage of Par 45 Max Ref Speed Speed Reg In Pct Total reference value input to t
104. IONS Group PI Control o z 695 764 765 771 776 777 778 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PI Steady Thrsh Feed forward threshold for PI e If the value if Par 758 Feed Fwd PID is less than the value of Par 695 PI Steady Thrsh the integral regulation will be locked and the proportional gain assumes the value set in Par 793 PI Init Prop Gn e When the value of Par 758 Feed Fwd PID exceeds the value of Par 695 PI Steady Thrsh the integral regulation with the gain set in Par 734 PI Init Intgl Gn will be enabled e The Proportional Integral PI block will maintain the gain values specified in Pars 793 PI Init Prop Gn and 734 PI Init Intgl Gn for the time specified in Par 731 PID Steady Delay once this time delay has elapsed the values of PI Init Prop Gn and PI Init Intgl Gn will be brought automatically to the values specified in Pars 765 PI Prop Gain PID and 764 PI Integral Gain respectively PI Integral Gain Integral gain of the PI block PI Prop Gain PID Proportional gain of the PI block Enable PI Enables Disables the PI portion of the PID regulator If assigned to a digital input this parameter must be brought at a high logical level 24V PI Output Output value of the PI block adapted to the value between the values defined in Pars 784 PI Upper Limit and 785 PI Lower Limit When the drive is turned o
105. Limi Torque Attribute 3 18 581 Dig Out Status Digital Outputs 3 69 753 TrqTpr_Lim2 Torque Attribute 13 18 584 OverCurrent Thr Alarms 3 53 754 TrqTpr_Lim3 Torque Attribute 3 18 755 TrqTpr_Lim4 Torque Attribute 3 18 Programming and Parameters 3 79 No Parameter Name Group Page No Parameter Name Group Page 756 TrqTpr_Spd Torque Attribute 3 18 1021 Encoder Out Sel Speed Feedback 3 20 757 PID Clamp PID Control 3 36 1027 Spd Reg Autotune Autotune 3 21 758 Feed Fwd PID PID Control 3 36 1029 Speed Tune Dir Autotune 3 21 759 PID Error PID Control 3 36 1030 Spd Tune Inertia Autotune 3 21 760 PID Setpoint 0 PID Control 3 36 1031 SpdTune Friction Autotune 3 21 761 PID Setpoint 1 PID Control 3 36 1032 Speed Tune Kp Autotune 3 21 762 PID Setpoint Sel PID Control 3 36 1033 Speed Tune Ki Autotune 3 21 763 PID Feedback PID Control 3 36 1042 Anlg Int Cmp Analog Inputs 3 62 764 Pl Integral Gain PI Control 33 1043 Anlg Ini Cmp Err Analog Inputs 3 62 765 PI Prop Gain PID PI Control 3 33 1044 Anlg Ini Cmp Dly Analog Inputs 3 62 766 PD Deriv Gain 1 PD Control 3 35 1045 Anlg Int Cmp Eq Analog Inputs 3 62 767 PD Deriv Filter PD Control 3 35 1046 PID Accel T
106. No Parameter Name Group Page No Parameter Name Group Page 159 Preset Speed 6 Discrete Speeds 3 23 385 Speed Ref Out Speed Meters 3 11 160 Preset Speed 7 Discrete Speeds 3 23 388 Flying Start En Speed Regulator 3 26 162 Max Feedback Spd Motor Data 3 14 393 Speed Threshold Diagnostics 3 4 169 Encoder PPR Speed Feedback 3 19 394 At Speed Diagnostics 3 48 175 Rated Motor Volt Motor Data 3 14 395 At Zero Speed Diagnostics 3 48 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Motor Data 3 14 396 MOP Inc Active Diagnostics 3 48 181 Adaptive Spd En Adaptv Regulator 3 31 397 MOP Dec Active Diagnostics 3 48 182 Adaptive Reg Typ Adaptv Regulator 3 31 400 Spd Select 0 Diagnostics 3 48 183 Adaptive Ref Adaptv Regulator 1 401 Spd Select 1 Diagnostics 3 4 184 Adaptive Spd 1 Adaptv Regulator 3 31 402 Spd Select 2 Diagnostics 3 49 185 Adaptive Spd 2 Adaptv Regulator 3 31 403 Ramp Select 0 Diagnostics 3 49 186 Adaptive Joint 1 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 404 Ramp Select 1 Diagnostics 49 187 Adaptive Joint 2 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 414 Fdbk Device Type Speed Feedback 3 19 188 Adaptive P Gain1 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 418 Real FF PID PID Control 3 35 189 Adaptive Gain1 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 420 Encoder Speed Speed Meters 3 11 190 Adaptive P Gain2 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 421 PD Output PID PD Control 3 35 191 Adaptive Gain2 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 444 Spd Fdbk Filter Speed Regulator 3 26 192 Adaptive P Gain3 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 445 Spd Up Gain Pct Speed Regulat
107. Not Used O Par 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel Set to other than 24 ContactorDB or 25 Contactor e g 0 Not Used 12 If you are using the HIM on the drive cover Port 1 for the speed reference access the DPI Inputs group and set the appropriate DPI Px Select parameter to 1 Speed Ref A 8 Tune the Current Regulator Complete this test before running the drive for the first time Upon completing this tuning procedure the armature resistance value is stored in Par 453 Arm Resistance and the armature inductance value is stored in Par 454 Arm Inductance If needed these values can be manually adjusted 1 If an external supply is used to power the motor field disconnect the wires from the motor field terminals If the drive supplies power to the motor field the internal field circuit will automatically be disabled during this test Important The drive must be under at least a 40 load in order to properly tune the current regulator Verify that the motor does not start rotating during the Current Regulator tuning test due to remnant magnetization field series etc If necessary mechanically block the motor shaft so it does not turn 2 Access the Motor Control file the Torq Attributes group and set Par 7 Current Limit to the appropriate level for your application This parameter defaults to 150 The drive s armature output current will correspond to Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps
108. P00 NEMA UL Type Open No 014 75 14 A 10 Outputs 019 10 19 A 10 B 115V ac Conversion Card 8 Digital 077 75 27 i 20 Inputs amp Outputs e 1 0 Expansion Card 115V ac 035 20 35 A 10 c Conversion Input Voltage A A 045 25 45 A 10 None 8 24V dc Digital Inputs amp Code Voltage 052 30 52 A 10 N Outputs 3 Analog Outputs and 2 B 230V ac 073 40 73 A 14 Analog Inputs are Standard 400V ac 086 50 86 A 14 p 460V ac 100 60 100 A 14 k les 123 12 128 14 Communication Options unt 1 iT 5 690V ac 167 100 167 B 20 Code Description 207 125 207 B 20 250 150 250 B 20 dv ales Standard for additional selections refer to the 330 200 330 B 20 PowerFlex Digital DC Drive Technical Data 412 250 412 B 20 publication 20P TD001 495 300 495 20 667 400 667 C 20 Cabinet Options Code Type N None Mounting Considerations Chapter 1 Installation and Wiring This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the PowerFlex DC drive For information on See page For information on See page Mounting Considerations 1 1 Control Power Protection 1 10 Mounting Dimensions and Weights 1 2 General Grounding Requirements 1 11 Lifting PowerFlex DC Drives 1 5 Power Circuit Protection 1 12 Removing the Drive Covers 1 7 Power Wiring 1 12 Line Reactors Filters 1 9 I O Wiring 1 27 Using Contactors 1 10 able UY Most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring Every precaut
109. PD The value specified in this field depends on the enabling and configuration of Par 181 Adaptive Spd En Enable PD Enables disables the PD portion of the PID regulator Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input PD Prop Gain 2 Second proportional gain of the block PD The value specified in this field depends on the enabling and configuration of Par 181 Adaptive Spd En PD Deriv Gain 2 Second derivative gain of the PD block The value specified in this field depends on the enabling and configuration of Par 181 Adaptive Spd En PD Prop Gain 3 Third proportional gain of the block PD The value specified in this field depends on the enabling and configuration of Par 181 Adaptive Spd En PD Deriv Gain 3 Third derivative gain of the PD block The value specified in this field depends on the enabling and configuration of Par 181 Adaptive Spd En Real FF PID Represents the feed forward value which has been recalculated according to the PI correction It will be calculated with the following formula Par 418 Real FF PID Par 758 Feed Fwd PID 1000 x Par 771 PI Output When either the negative or positive limit of this parameter has been reached further increases in the value of Par 771 PI Output will be blocked in order to avoid undesirable saturation of the PID regulator For example When Par 758 Feed Fwd PID 8000 the positive limit of Par 771 PI Output will be automat
110. PowerFlex Digital DC Drive USER MANUAL Firmware Version 1 006 ALLEN BRADLEY ROCKWELL SOFTWARE Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction o
111. Ramp 373 Decel Time 2 32 S Curve Accel 2 667 Acc Dec Filter 1212 Load Limits Enable Droop 699 Droop Limit 700 Torq Limit Type 715 Droop Percent 696 Load Comp 698 Droop Filter 697 Torq Red CurLim 13 Stop Modes Fast Stop Time 38 Closing Speed 1262 Ramp In Zero En 1265 Spd 0 Trip Delay 627 Opening Delay 1263 Actuator Delay 1266 Restart Modes Start At Powerup 1344 Powerup Delay 1345 Adaptv Regulator Adaptive Spd En 181 Adaptive Joint 1 186 Adaptive I Gain2 191 Adaptive Reg Typ 182 Adaptive Joint 2 187 Adaptive P Gain3 192 Adaptive Ref 183 Adaptive P Gain1 188 Adaptive Gain3 193 Adaptive Spd 1 184 Adaptive I Gain1 189 Adaptive Spd 2 185 Adaptive P Gain2 190 3 8 Programming and Parameters File Group Parameters Applications PI Control Enable PI 769 PI Central v1 776 PI Central vs1 781 er PI Steady Thrsh 695 PI Central v2 777 PI integr freeze 783 Pl Integral Gain 764 PI Central v3 778 PI Upper Limit 784 PI Prop Gain PID 765 PI Central v sel 779 PI Lower Limit 785 PI Output 771 PI Central vs0 780 PI Init Prop Gn 793 PD Control Enable PD 770 PD Deriv Filter 767 PD Deriv Gain 2 789 PD Output PID 421 PD Prop Gain 1 768 PD Prop Gain 3 790 PD Deriv Gain 1 766 PD Prop Gain 2 788 PD Deriv Gain 3 791 PID Control Enable PID 1258 PID Setpoint 0 760 PID Target 782 Real FF PID 418 PID Setpoint 1 761 PID Source 786 PID Steady Dela
112. Reserved 1 SpdZeroThr 9 Fault 17 Diam Calc 25 Reserved 2 Spd Thresh 10 Power Loss 18 Input Cmp 26 Alarm 3 At Speed 11 UserDefinedA 19 Diam Reached 27 Running 4 CurrentLimit 12 UserDefinedB 20 Speed Match 28 Jogging 5 Ready 13 Stop Control 21 Accelerating 29 Active 6 Ramp Pos 14 Field Loss 22 Decelerating Ramp Neg Spd Fok Loss 23 Brake Cmd 3 68 INPUT OUTPUT Digital Outputs Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Option Definitions for Digital Outx Sel Relay Out 1 Sel and Relay Out 2 Sel Option Description Spd Zero Thr 0 indicates that the drive is operating below the value set in Par 107 Speed Zero Level 1 indicates that the drive is operating above Par 107 Speed Zero Level Spd Thresh 0 indicates that the drive is operating above the value set in Par 101 Speed Thresh Pos 1 indicates that the drive is operating below Par 101 Speed Thresh Pos At Speed 0 indicates that the actual speed is within the range specified in Par 104 At Speed Error 1 indicates that the actual speed is outside the range specified in Par 104
113. Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Zero En 123 Speed Regulator 3 25 Scale3 In Min 1223 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Zero P En 125 Speed Regulator 3 26 Scale3 In Off 1224 Scale Blocks 3 39 SpdFuncSelect 1016 Speed Regulator 3 27 Scale3 Input 1218 Scale Blocks 3 38 SpdReg FB Bypass 458 Speed Feedback 3 19 Scale3 Mul 1220 Scale Blocks 3 38 SpdReg Ki Bypass 460 Speed Regulator 3 27 Scale3 Out Off 1225 Scale Blocks 3 39 SpdReg Kp Bypass 459 Speed Regulator 3 27 Scale3 Output 1219 Scale Blocks 3 38 SpdTune Friction 1031 Autotune 3 21 Scale4 Div 1230 Scale Blocks 3 38 Speed Demand En 1215 Winder Functions 3 43 Scale4 In Abs 1235 Scale Blocks 3 39 Speed Draw Out 1018 Speed Meters 3 12 Scale4 In Max 1231 Scale Blocks 3 38 Speed Match 1195 Winder Functions 3 42 Scale4 In Min 1232 Scale Blocks 3 38 Speed Ramp En 245 Ramp Rates 3 29 Scale4 In Off 1233 Scale Blocks 3 39 Speed Ratio 1017 Speed References 3 24 Scale4 Input 1227 Scale Blocks 3 38 Speed Ref A 44 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale4 Mul 1229 Scale Blocks 3 38 Speed Ref A Pct 47 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale4 Out Off 1234 Scale Blocks 3 39 Speed Ref B 48 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale4 Output 1228 Scale Blocks 3 38 Speed Ref B Pct 49 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale5 Div 1239 Scale Blocks 3 38 Speed Ref Out 385 Speed Meters 3 11
114. Spd Source 1204 Winder Functions 3 43 PID Accel Time 1046 PID Control 3 37 Line Spd Thresh 1155 Diameter Calc 3 40 PID Clamp 757 PID Control 3 36 Line Speed Pct 1160 Diameter Calc 3 40 PID Decel Time 1047 PID Control 3 37 Load Comp 698 Load Limits 3 30 PID Error 759 PID Control 3 36 Local Mask 599 Masks amp Owners 3 58 PID Error Gain 1254 PID Control 3 38 Local Owner 608 Masks amp Owners 3 58 PID Feedback 763 PID Control 3 36 Lock Speed Integ 348 Speed Regulator 3 26 PID Output 774 PID Control 3 36 Logic Mask 591 Masks amp Owners 3 57 PID Output Scale 773 PID Control 3 36 Secur 259 PID Output Sign 772 PID Control 3 36 Logic Mask Act 1376 Security 3 59 PID Setpoint 0 760 PID Control 335 Man Ref ji 210 Ref Somy 3 45 PID Setpoint 1 761 PID Control 3 30 Materl tal Pet 1173 eee Functions 3 41 PID Setpoint Sel 762 PID Control 3 30 Max a 796 wall ter Calc 3 39 PID Source 786 PID Control 337 Max Diameter 1153 Diameter Calc 3 40 PID Source Gain 787 PID Control 337 Max Feedback Spd 162 Motor Data 3 14 PID Steady Delay 731 PID Control 335 Max Fld Curr Pct 467 Field Config 3 15 PID Target 782 PID Control 337 Marcel Speed P MolorDala 2 Port Mask Act 1379 Securi 3 60 Max Speed Fwd i Limits 3 28 Powerup Delay 1345 Restart Modes 3 31 Max Speed Rev 4 Limits 3 23 Preset Speed 1 154 Discrete Speeds 3 23 Maximum Speed i Hits 223 Preset Speed 2 155 Discrete Speeds 3 23 Min Fid Curr Pct 468 Field Config 3 15 Preset Speed 3 156 Discret
115. Speed Meters 11 43 Trim Speed Speed Reference 3 24 114 Ramp Out Pct Speed Meters 3 11 44 Speed Ref A Speed Meters 3 11 117 Speed Reg In Pct Speed Meters 3 11 45 Max Ref Speed Motor Data 3 14 118 Speed Reg In Speed Meters 3 11 47 Speed Ref A Pct Speed Meters 3 11 121 Spd Feedback Pct Speed Meters 3 11 48 Speed Ref B Speed Meters 3 11 122 Spd Feedback Speed Meters 3 11 49 Speed Ref B Pct Speed Meters 3 11 123 Spd Zero I En Speed Regulator 3 25 50 UsrDsplyMultO User Defined 3 53 124 Spd Ref Zero En Speed Regulator 3 26 51 UsrDsplyDivO User Defined 3 53 125 Spd Zero P En Speed Regulator 3 26 53 UsrValMult1 User Defined 3 53 126 Spd Zero P Gain Speed Regulator 3 26 54 UsrValDiv1 User Defined 3 53 133 Digital Int Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 57 FaultCode Drive Data 3 13 134 Digital In2 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 58 stGen Output Test Generator 3 22 135 Digital In3 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 59 stGen Frequency Test Generator 3 22 136 Digital In4 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 60 stGen Amplitude Test Generator 3 22 137 Digital In5 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 61 stGen Offset Test Generator 3 22 138 Digital In6 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 62 Anlg Out1 Scale Analog Outputs 3 63 139 Digital In7 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 63 Anlg Out2 Scale Analog Outputs 3 63 140 Digital In8 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 64 Anlg Out3 Scale Analog Outputs 3 63 141 Digital In9 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 65 Anlg Out4 Scale Analog Outputs 3 63 142 Digital In10 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 66 Anlg Out1 Sel Analog O
116. W sereo death bee deh eee eae a daw ala cu baa de 3 3 Cross Reference Tables avavvvvava vanene nnn narre even 3 3 Basic Parameter VieW 1 aksess re een eg Keke ske eden kat tae 3 4 Advanced Parameter View avunvnvnvnenenvararneanevevararnueuever 3 6 Monitor Pile josie nipeni ra a a a eiii 3 11 Motor Control Pil ira ci ao a Gide aE E we eee at aes 3 14 Speed Command File y anser bse E E ii 3 23 Dynamic Control File ici e erea e AA eee eee ek Lee N 3 28 Appleati ns File seu rieseni de imitar ae pic 3 33 Utility Piles tidad wellness wet abs wet oe aah ihe adds 3 45 Communications File 2 0 0 0 cece eee ene ran 3 57 Input Output Files se a Ne Wh ee er Od de dia 3 61 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 71 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 0 0 0c eee eee eee eee ee 3 76 Troubleshooting Faults nd Alarms 2 20 ose 30 boas a he Se Shee ee 4 1 Drive Status at di 4 2 HIM Indica it hilo be 4 3 Manually Clearing Pauls uva ea at 4 3 Fault Descriptions cti des inn Gen ine dla ad fansen Faso tes 4 4 Clearing Alarms saci isc Sek Gn Re tee Pas Ses aaah canes et sched a es 4 7 Alarm Descriptions 2 0 2 ce ne drenere ee ee nee anken 4 7 Common Drive Symptoms and Corrective Actions 0 0 c eee eee eee 4 10 Drive will not Start sau erotica rata das ade 4 10 Drive starts but motor does not turn and no armature current 4 12 The motor does not r
117. able Selection between PI and PD winder operation Par 1201 Winder Side Jog TW En Enables disables the Torque Winder jog function Par 1256 Jog TW Enable 1 Adigital input 1 2 This option is not 8 only must be configured for Enable available Reserved for digital inputs 9 12 3 65 Related 3 66 S z 564 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 INPUT OUTPUT Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Dig In Status Read Only Status of the digital inputs N o 2 8 IS e E E2 EEE EE iz 515 5 15 3 3 EIS 8833303830 STAAL AA Default x x x x 0 0 0 10 0 10 10 10 0 10 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 B 210 Dig In Term 1 Default Read Only Dig In Term 2 Dig In Term 3 Min Max 0 1 Dig In Term 4 Dig In Term 5 Dig In Term 6 Dig In Term 7 Dig In Term 8 Dig In Term 9 Dig In Term 10 Dig In Term 11 Dig In Term 12 Status of the digital inputs 0 Low 1 High Inversion In 1 Default 0 Disabled Veere 4 3 Options 0 Disabled Inversion In 4 1 Enabled Inversion In 5 Inversion In 6 Inversion In 7 Inversion In 8 Inversion In 9 Inversion In 10 Inversion In 11 Inversion In 12 inverts the digital input signal ContactorControl Default 1
118. able value such as the value of Par 45 Max Ref Speed Two conditions are necessary for automatic fine tuning e An input voltage greater than 1V or an input current greater than 2 mA e Positive polarity The value found is automatically set for the opposite direction for four quadrant drives Note The automatically calculated value can if necessary be modified manually via parameter Ainx Tune Scale When using analog input tuning Pars Analog Inx Scale are normally set to 1 0 Anlg In1 Target Anlg In2 Target Anlg In3 Target Enables sampling for the analog inputs Anlg In1 Filter Analog input 1 filter Anlg Ini Cmp Defines a reference point for the signal of analog input 1 around which a comparison range can be set via Par 1043 Anlg In1 Cmp Err and monitored Anlg Int Cmp comparison value x 10000 max reference value where the values of comparison and max reference are determined by the min max of the related parameter selected via Par 70 Anlg In1 Sel Anlg Ini Cmp Err Defines a value above and below the value set in parameter 1042 Anlg In1 Cmp at which Par 1045 Anlg In1 Cmp Eq will transition Anlg Int Cmp Err tolerance value x 10000 max reference value where the values of tolerance and max reference are determined by the min max of the parameter selected via Par 70 Anlg In1 Sel Anlg Ini Cmp Dly Amount of time that must elapse a
119. ables the Torque Winder jog function Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input Ref Spd Source Number of the line speed reference sampling parameter used for inertia compensation and line speed reference Ref Speed Gain Gain value for the line speed reference The value of this parameter depends on the value of Par 1284 Ref Spd Source The value of Ref Speed Gain is used to obtain a line speed reference 100 at its maximum value Ref Line Speed Line speed percentage Static F Zero Enables Disables friction compensation e Enabled The fiction compensation value is added to all speed values e Disabled The static friction compensation value is added to Par 1286 Ref Line Speed 1 5 Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Options Read Only 8192 RPM 0 0 100 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 65535 0 0 32767 Read Only 0 00 150 00 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Related a o 1160 1284 1286 File UTILITY Programming and Parameters Utility File a 3 Parameter Name amp Description amp S
120. actors Dynamic Brake Resistors Refer to DC Output Contactors and Dynamic Brake Resistor Kits on page A 18 for a list of recommended dynamic brake resistor kits The 115V 230V AC control circuit power input terminals U2 and V2 are required to be short circuit protected This protection can be provided by using standard time delay fuses or a circuit breaker The time delay fuses or circuit breaker must be selected to survive the short circuit available current of the feeder source for this circuit and the inrush current of the drive s power supply The rating of the fuses or circuit breaker should be sized mainly to protect the wiring from the fuses circuit breaker connections to terminals U2 and V2 and not nuisance trip or blow from the inrush current The table below lists the input current characteristics of the control power Table 1 D Control Power Protection Drive Current Control Power Supply Rating Code Rated input current Inrush input current Frame 230V 460V Board ID Power 115V 230V 115V 230V 7P0 4P1 A through through SW1 31 60W 1A 0 5A 20A 10A 110 129 146 167 B amp C through through SW2 32 110W 1 2A 0 7 A 15A 75A 521 667 1 Refer to Catalog Number Explanation on page Preface 4 positions 8 10 for corresponding drive HP rating armature amp rating and field amp rating Control power input should be supplied by a power source that is stabilized and bu
121. ained when the Units Ohm current regulator auto tuning is completed 454 Arm Inductance Default 4 00 452 Motor armature inductance This parameter can be manually Min Max Based on drive current rating changed to a value other than the value obtained when the Units mH current regulator auto tuning is completed 587 I Reg Error Default Read Only 452 The auxiliary signal used to determine whether the current Min Max 80 regulator is correctly tuned The value should be as near to zero Units V as possible but values between 40 are acceptable 1012 Inertia C Filter Default 0 First order low pass filter used to reduce noise caused by the Min Max 0 1000 speed differentiation process in the Inertia Loss compensation Units ms block 1013 Torque Const Default Based on drive current rating The Motor torque constant used to calculate inertia and friction Min Max 0 01 99 99 compensation The value in this parameter is automatically Units N m A adapted in the field weakening mode This value is determined during speed auto tuning 1014 Inertia Default Based on drive current rating Motor inertia value Min Max 0 001 999 999 1 Kg m 23 76 lb ft Units Kg m 1015 Friction Default Based on drive current rating Motor friction value Min Max 0 000 99 990 1 N m 0 738 lb ft Units N m l oe oc e Ss S e Group Autotune 1030 1031 1032 1033 1048 Parameter Na
122. al Enables exclusive drive control via the I O Terminal Block only Acc2 amp Dec2 Switches between the Accel Decel 1 and Accel Decel 2 ramp rates Accel 2 Switches between the Accel 1 and Accel 2 ramp rates Decel 2 Switches between the Decel 1 and Decel 2 ramp rates MOP Inc Asserting causes the MOP reference to increment at the rate set in Par 22 MOP Accel Time MOP Dec Asserting causes the MOP reference to decrement at the rate set in Par 30 MOP Decel Time Fast Stop Causes the drive to Stop at the rate set in Par 38 Fast Stop Time Contactor Indicates the status of the main contactor DB contactor Must be assigned and asserted in order to run drive when Par 1391 ContactorControl Contactor or Contactor DB MOP Reset Asserting resets the MOP reference to zero TorqueReduce Turns on off Torque Reduction using the reduced current limit set in Par 13 Torq Red CurLim Field Reg En Enables disables the field regulator Par 497 Field Reg Enable Fid Weak En Enables disables the field weakening function Par 469 Field Mode Sell Freeze Ramp Holds the speed ramp at the present value Par 373 Freeze Ramp UsrDefinedA0 7 Writes the value of the digital input to Pars 520 UsrDefBitWrdA0 527 UsrDefBitWrdA7 Droop Enable Enables disables the Droop function 699 Enable Droop PD Enable Enables disables the PD block of the PID regulator Par 770 Enable PD PI Cent vs0 1 In combination the digital inputs set t
123. al input Values Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 10 0 00 32 00 m 1 00 0 00 32 00 m 0 00 0 00 199 99 0 00 0 00 199 99 100 0 200 9 00 0 15 300 s Enabled Disabled Enabled 1 0 1 100 00 0 00 100 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 Winder Winder Unwinder Read Only 0 00 200 00 Read Only 0 00 199 99 Off Off 0 0 1 On Related 1180 1182 1184 1185 1186 1182 1182 1182 1179 1180 File APPLICATIONS Group Winder Functions Programming and Parameters nol Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 1196 Spd Match Acc Default 83 88 Motor acceleration time during the launching phase Min Max 0 30 300 00 Units S 1197 Spd Match Dec Default 83 88 Motor deceleration time If the motor decelerates duri
124. als C amp D Terminals U V W Two Quadrant Drive Four Quadrant Drive 230V 10 3Ph 260V 240V 400V 10 3Ph 470V 420V 440V 10 3Ph 530V 460V 460V 10 3Ph 560V 480V 480V 10 3Ph 580V 500V Field Circuit AG Input Voltage DC Output Field Voltage Terminals C1 amp D1 Terminals U1 amp V1 Fixed Field Adjustable Field 230V 15 1Ph 200V 200V 400V 15 1Ph 310V 310V 460V 10 1Ph 360V 360V 0 The max field voltage is equal to 0 85 x AC input line voltage Typical Power Wiring Diagrams The following diagram represents recommended power wiring configurations Figure 1 10 Power Wiring with AC Input Contactor PowerFlex DC Drive Digital In 8 Series contactor status N O Relay T AC Contactor 4 Control Board P S 1 14 Installation and Wiring Figure 1 11 Power Wiring with AC Input Contactor and a Dynamic Brake PowerFlex DC Drive Digital In 8 v Series contactor status 75876 3 Phase AC line Relay Out 2 36 Relay Out 1 DB Contactor N C Relay 35 Relay Out 1 E U2 Control Board P S PowerFlex DC Drive ss 506 Relay Out 1 N O Relay DC Contactor c E Digital In 8 Series contactor status 3 Phase AC line Control Field oard P S Installation and Wiring 1 15 Figure 1 13 Power Wiring with DC Output Contactor and a Dynamic Brake 3 Phase AC line
125. alue of the drive and that all power wiring is correct Refer to Power Wiring on page 1 12 for further information armature output terminals personal injury and or equipment A ATTENTION Do not connect any external power to the damage can occur 3 Verify the Control and I O Wiring 1 Verify that control power and I O wiring is correct A digital input 1 8 only must be wired and configured as a drive enable Refer to Control Circuit Input Power on page 1 24 and I O Wiring on page 1 27 for further information 2 If you are using a PTC thermistor or thermal switch to protect the motor from overloading remove the 1k ohm resistor between terminals 78 and 79 Refer to Thermistors and Thermal Switches on page 1 21 Drive Start Up 2 3 Applying Power to the Drive The remainder of the Drive Start Up procedure in this manual uses a HIM to configure and autotune the drive If you prefer you can use the DriveExplorer or DriveTools SP software to program drive parameters or use the drive Start Up wizard available with both software packages If an operator interface is not available remote devices should be used to start up the drive For information on using the HIM refer to the HIM Overview on page B 1 Important When power is first applied the HIM may require approximately 5 seconds until commands are recognized including the Stop key 4 Apply Voltage to the Control Circuits 1 Apply power to the
126. ameter 12 Motor Speed 66 Anlg Out1 Sel No Signal 21 Analog Output 1 22 Analog Output 1 Description Max 10V 5 mA 23 Analog Output 2 13 Motor Curr 67 Anlg Out2 Sel 24 Analog Output 2 25 Digital Output Common 26 Digital Output 1 Max 30V 50mA 5 Ready 145 Digital Out1 Sel 27 Digital Output 2 28 Digital Output 3 29 Digital Output 4 30 External 24VDC Supply Supply voltage for the Digital Outputs Max 30V DC 80mA 9 Fault 146 2 Spd Thresh 147 4 CurrentLimit 148 Digital Out2 Sel Digital Out3 Sel Digital Out4 Sel Table 1 U 1 0 Terminal Block 4 Designations No Signal Description Factory Default Config Parameter 31 Digital Input 5 Max 30V 15V 3 2mA 24V 5mA 17 Speed Sel 1 137 Digital In5 Sel 32 Digital Input 6 and 30V 6 4mA 18 Speed Sel 2 138 Digital In6 Sel 33 Digital Input 7 19 Speed Sel 3 139 Digital In7 Sel 34 Digital Input 8 31 Contactor 140 Digital In8 Sel 35 Digital Input Common 36 Not Used 40 0 When using the internal 24V DC supply terminal 19 for digital inputs 5 8 you must connect the digital input common terminal 35 to the 24V supply common terminal 18
127. amp rate Pars 662 Decel Time 1 and 32 Decel Time 2 for the drive 631 Decel Mask See Logic Mask 32 O Controls which adapters can select the deceleration ramp 662 rate Pars 662 Decel Time 1 and 32 Decel Time 2 of the drive File COMMUNICATIONS Security 1376 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table The value will not be updated until the drive is stopped Refer to your communications option manual for datalink information Data In B1 Link B Word 1 Data In B2 Link B Word 2 Data In C1 Link C Word 1 Data In C2 Link C Word 2 Data In D1 Link D Word 1 Data In D2 Link D Word 2 Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Data In Val Sel Selects the Datalink parameter register to display in Par 1320 Data In Sel Data Data In SelData Displays the value selected in Par 1319 Data In Val Sel Logic Mask Values Default Min Max Programmin
128. and controls the motor from zero to motor base speed If a curve is defined through Pars 916 917 and 918 Fld Const xx Pct this value will change linearly through Par 467 Max Fld Curr Pct which is a percentage of the nominal flux value set in Par 280 Nom Mtr Fld AmpsJ e Field Weaken The motor field is regulated with a combination of torque and constant power armature and field regulation i e field weakening The maximum armature voltage is configured in Par 175 Rated Motor Volt e External The motor field power is supplied by an external rectifier converter the drive s field output is disabled Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input 35 Fld Weak En to allow switching between Base Speed and Field Weakening modes Field Reg Enable Enables Disables the field regulator e Enabled The field regulator is enabled and controlling the field output e Disabled The field regulator is disabled i e The field current is zero In addition Par 473 FldLoss Flt Cfg should be set to 0 Ignore Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input Force Min Field Enables Disables field weakening e Enabled The field current corresponds to the value set via Par 468 Min Fld Curr Pct e Disabled The field current is regulated based on the quadrant mode and situation in which the drive is operating Field Economy En When this parameter is se
129. ar 30 Units s File Group Ramp Rates NINo 3 245 344 345 373 660 662 665 666 667 668 1212 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Decel Time 2 Sets the rate of deceleration for Ramp 2 Deceleration rate for Ramp 2 Par 2 Maximum Speed Par 30 Decel Time 2 Speed Ramp En Enables or disables the ramp function The Ramp Reference block is bypassed when this parameter is set to 0 Disabled Zero Ramp Output Activates either the ramp output 1 or the brake function 0 When this parameter is set to 0 Active the drive brakes through the maximum available torque and the motor will perform a Current Limit Stop Two quadrant drives do not support a brake option e Active The ramp output is disabled and Pars 113 Ramp Out and 114 Ramp Out Pct are immediately set to zero e Not Active The ramp output is enabled and Pars 113 Ramp Out and 114 Ramp Out Pct follow the Ramp Reference block commands Zero Ramp Input Activates or deactivates the ramp input e Active The ramp input is not active and Pars 110 Ramp In and 111 Ramp In Pct 0 e Not Active The ramp input is activated and Pars 110 Ramp In and 111 Ramp In Pct correspond to the set reference Freeze Ramp Determines whether the last ramp output reference value is retained or whether the ramp output reference value is ac
130. arameter number from which the PID source value will be read E Options E E 2 2 0 Not Used 16 SpdRegOutPct Par 236 32 UsrDefined13 Par 516 1 Cur Lim Pos Par 8 17 Max Fld Pct Par 467 33 UsrDefined14 Par 517 2 Cur Lim Neg Par 9 18 Fld Ref Pct Par 500 34 UsrDefined15 Par 518 3 CurLimPosOut Par 10 19 UsrDefined0 Par 503 35 Load Comp Par 698 4 CurLimNegOut Par 11 120 UsrDefined1 Par 504 36 Out Volt Lvi Par 921 5 TrqRedCurLim Par 13 21 UsrDefined2 Par 505 37 Filt Trq Cur Par 928 Torque Ref Par 39 22 UsrDefined3 Par 506 38 Speed Ratio Par 1017 7 Trim Torque Par 40 23 UsrDefined4 Par 507 39 Spd Draw Out Par 1018 TorqueReg In Par 41 24 UsrDefined5 Par 508 40 Roll Diam Par 1154 9 Trim Ramp Par 42 25 UsrDefined6 Par 509 41 Tension Red Par 1179 10 Trim Speed Par 43 26 UsrDefined7 Par 510 42 Torq Cur Pct Par 1193 11 Ramp In Par 110 27 UsrDefined8 Par 511 43 Ten Ref Pct Par 1194 12 Ramp Out Par 113 28 UsrDefined9 Par 512 44 CloseLp Comp Par 1208 13 Speed Reg In Par 118 29 UsrDefined10 Par 513 45 Actual Comp Par 1213 14 Ada
131. c2 amp Dec2 or 27 Decel 2 e 0 Decel 1 ramp rate is selected e 1 Decel 2 ramp rate is selected a This parameter can be assigned to indicate the state of a digital input Encoder State Indicates the connection status of the digital encoder or tachometer e 0 Fault e 1 OK This parameter can be assigned to a digital output Accel Status Indicates the drive acceleration status e 0 Off Drive not accelerating e 1 On Drive accelerating Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output Decel Status Indicates the drive deceleration status e 0 Off Drive not decelerating e 1 On Drive decelerating Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output Fast Stop Status Indicates the drive fast stop status e 0 Off Drive is not fast stopping e 1 On Drive is fast stopping Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Programming and Parameters Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 Read Only 0 1 3 49 Related 400 402 400 401 404 403 3 50 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page
132. crPosSpd Desired motor speed when the dancer is positioned in its central working position Max Deviation A value expressed in counts of D A that corresponds to the position of maximum shift admitted by the dancer This value is considered the starting measurement of the dancer movement during the initial diameter calculation phase Gear Box Ratio Ratio reduction between the motor and the swift lt 1 Dancer Constant The measurement corresponding to the total bunching of the material in the dancer Minimum Diameter Minimum value of the swift diameter Diameter Calc St Status of the initial diameter calculation e 0 The initial diameter calculation has not completed e The initial diameter calculation has completed Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Programming and Parameters 0 00 291 4281 0 00 291 428 1 Off Off On 0 O 0 1 0 100 8000 10000 1 000 0 000 1 000 1 1 10000 mm 100 1 2000 mm Read Only 0 1 3 39 Related 3 40 File APPLICATIONS Group Diameter Calc Programming and Parameters No 1153 1154 1155 1156 1
133. ctrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A B publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive surrounding air temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with DC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring p 4 Overview Catalog Number
134. current limit may occur Spd Up Gain Pct The Speed Up function gain as a percentage of Par 446 Speed Up Base Logic Mask Determines which ports can control the drive when Par 1377 Reserved Values Default Options Default Min Max Units 0 00 Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 00 100 00 Write Mask Act bit 15 is set to 1 If the bit for a port is set to 0 the port will have no control functions except for stop 0 Control Masked 1 Control Permitted x Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Default Reserved Il gt Reserved gt X Reserved S DPI Port 5 2 DPI Port 4 DPI Port 3 N 2 DPI Port 2 DPI Port 1 gt Digital In Reserved al x P de r PO x ak o Bit Description File Lists the major parameter file category Related amp I I r Group Lists the parameter group within a file No Parameter number The parameter value cannot be changed until the drive is stopped Parameter Name amp Description Parameter name as it appears on an LCD HIM with a brief description of the parameters function Go OO OF Values Defines the various operating characteristics of the parameter Three types exist ENUM Default Lists the value assigned a
135. d 1158 Diameter Calc 3 40 Anlg2 Tune Scale 78 Analog Inputs 3 61 Diameter Calc 794 Diameter Calc 3 39 3 72 Programming and Parameters Name No Group Page Name No Group Page Diameter Calc St 800 Diameter Calc 3 39 Enable PD 770 PD Control 3 35 Diameter Filter 1162 Diameter Calc 3 40 Enable Pl 769 PI Control 3 33 Diameter Reached 1159 Diameter Calc 3 40 Enable PID 1258 PID Control 3 38 Diameter Reset 1157 Diameter Calc 3 40 Encoder Err Chk 652 Speed Feedback 3 19 Dig In Status 564 Digital Inputs 3 66 Encoder Out Sel 1021 Speed Feedback 3 20 Dig In Term 1 565 Digital Inputs 3 Encoder PPR 169 Speed Feedback 3 19 Dig In Term 10 574 Digital Inputs 3 66 Encoder Speed 420 Speed Meters 3 11 Dig In Term 11 575 Digital Inputs 3 66 Encoder State 651 Diagnostics 3 49 Dig In Term 12 576 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fast Stop Status 1190 Diagnostics 3 49 Dig In Term 2 566 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fast Stop Time 38 Stop Modes 3 30 Dig In Term 3 567 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fault 1 Code 1351 Faults 3 52 Dig In Term 4 568 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fault 1 Time 1361 Faults 3 52 Dig In Term 5 569 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fault 10 Code 1360 Faults 3 52 D
136. d 79 The drive s response to a motor over temperature fault is configured in parameter 365 OverTemp FIt Cfg If a temperature sensor is not used a 1k ohm resistor must be connected between terminals 78 and 79 installed at the factory Follow the appropriate instructions below when installing a thermal sensor Thermistors PTC PTC thermistors fitted in the motor can be connected directly to the drive via terminals 78 and 79 In this case the 1k ohm resistor is not required between terminals 78 and 79 1 22 Installation and Wiring Thermal Switches Klixon in the Motor Windings Klixon type temperature dependent contacts can disconnect the drive from the motor via an external control or can be configured as an external fault using a digital input on drive They can also be connected to terminals 78 and 79 in order to indicate a drive Motor Over Temp fault F16 though this is not recommended due to the noise sensitivity of the current threshold circuitry If a thermal switch is used a 1k ohm resistor must be placed in series between the switch and one of the terminals Table 1 1 Relay Output Terminal Designations Terminal Maximum Voltage Maximum Current 35 amp 36 75 amp 76 250V AC 1A Table 1 J Recommended Signal Wire Size for Relay Outputs and Thermistor Thermal Switch Terminals Wire Type and Size Flexible multi core Signal Type Terminals mm mm Relay Outputs 35 amp 36 75 amp 76 Therm
137. d in Par 185 Adaptive Spd 2 The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined Par 93 Spd Reg Kp Base Adaptive Gain2 Integral gain for the range of values defined beginning with the value of Par 184 Adaptive Spd 1 to the value defined in Par 185 Adaptive Spd 2 The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined Par 94 Spd Reg Ki Base Adaptive P Gain3 Proportional gain for the range of values beginning above the value defined in Par 185 Adaptive Spd 2 The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined Par 93 Spd Reg Kp Base Adaptive Gain3 Integral gain for the range of values beginning above the value defined in Par 185 Adaptive Spd 2 The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined Par 94 Spd Reg Ki Base Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 6 11 0 00 200 00 6 11 0 00 200 00 10 00 0 00 100 00 1 00 0 00 100 00 10 00 0 00 100 00 1 00 0 00 100 00 10 00 0 00 100 00 1 00 0 00 100 00 Related 185 184 94 184 93 184 185 94 184 185 93 185 94 185 Applications File ee File APPLICAT
138. d with Options 0 Disabled External Brake Control 1 Enabled 1266 Actuator Delay Default 0 Amount of time before the actuator releases the load Used with Min Max 0 30000 External Brake Control Units ms 1344 Start At Powerup Default 0 Disabled 1345 Enables Disables the ability to issue a Run command and Options 0 Disabled O automatically resume running at commanded speed after drive input 1 Enabled power is restored and the time in Par 1345 Powerup Delay has elapsed Requires a digital input configured for Run and a valid start condition ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines 1345 Powerup Delay Default 1 1344 Defines the programmed delay time in seconds before a start Min Max 1 10800 command is accepted after a power up If a Start Run or Stop Units s command is asserted before the time in this parameter expires the Start At Powerup function will be aborted 181 Adaptive Spd En Default 0 Disabled 182 Enables Disables adaptive speed regulation Options 0 Disabled 183 The adaptive speed regulator function enables different gains of the 1 Enabled O speed regulator depending on the speed or another variabl
139. e Par 183 Adaptive Ref This allows optimum adaptation of the speed regulator to your specific application When adaptive speed regulation is disabled the regulator operates based on the settings in the individual regulation parameters 182 Adaptive Reg Typ Default 0 Speed 183 O Selects the type of regulation used Options O Speed O e Speed The regulator parameters follow a speed reference 1 Adaptive Ref e Adaptive Ref The regulator parameters follow the reference produced by Par 183 Adaptive Ref 183 Adaptive Ref Default 1000 182 The variable reference that the speed regulator parameter will follow Min Max 32768 32767 O when Par 182 Adaptive Reg Typ 1 Adaptive Ref Units RPM 184 Adaptive Spd 1 Default 20 34 183 A percentage of Par 45 Max Ref Speed or the maximum value of Par Min Max 0 00 200 00 186 183 Adaptive Ref Units O Parameter set 1 is valid below the value set in this parameter and parameter set 2 is valid above the value set in this parameter The transition between the values is defined by Par 186 Adaptive Joint 1 185 Adaptive Spd 2 Default 40 69 183 A percentage of Par 45 Max Ref Speed or the maximum value of Par Min Max 0 00 200 00 Ga 183 Adaptive Ref Units 17 Parameter set 2 is valid below the value set in this parameter and parameter set 3 is valid above the value set in this parameter The transition between the values is defin
140. e amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PID Clamp The PID clamp allows a smooth tension setting of a controlled system winder unwinder when the calculation of the initial diameter function cannot be used e When enabling the drive the dancer is at the lowest point of its full scale In this case with Par 759 PID Error at its maximum value the motor could accelerate too fast to properly configure the dancer for its central operating position By setting the value of Par 757 PID Clamp sufficiently low e g 1000 when the drive starts and Par 770 Enable PD 1 Enable the value of Par 759 PID Error is limited to 1000 until the signal coming from the dancer via Par 763 PID Feedback goes above the value in this field Then the value of PID Clamp is automatically returned to its maximum value of 10000 The PID clamp is kept at 10000 until the drive stops or Par 770 Enable PD 0 Disabled Feed Fwd PID Feedback from the transducer position dancer or tension PID Error Error value input to the PID function output of the PID Clamp block PID Setpoint 0 First offset value added to Par 763 PID Feedback This parameter can be assigned to an analog input e g for the tension setting when a load cell must be used as feedback PID Setpoint 1 Second offset value added to Par 763 PID Feedback PID Setpoint Sel Selects the offset value added to Par 763 PID Feedback T
141. e up of twisted pairs with the shield connected to the shield ground on the drive side Do not connect the shield to ground on the motor side In some cases i e cable lengths that exceed 100 meters it may be necessary to ground the shield of each twisted pair on the power supply Refer to page A 3 for Digital Encoder specifications Figure 1 33 Digital Encoder Terminal Block Location As A B B Z Z COH V VA Shield ground Digital Encoder Control EMI Shield terminal block Table 1 V Digital Encoder Terminal Designations No Description A Encoder A Single channel or quadrature A A Encoder A NOT input B Encoder B Dual channel quadrature B input B Encoder B NOT Z Encoder Z Pulse marker or registration Z Encoder Z NOT input COM 5 12 15V DC Return _ Internal power common V 5 12 15V DC Power Internal power source 200 mA 1 Selectable via switch 21 on the Control board Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 Selectable via switch 20 on the Control board Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 Installation and Wiring 1 37 Figure 1 34 Sample Encoder Wiring
142. e Speeds 323 Min Speed Fwd y sil 3 28 Preset Speed 4 157 Discrete Speeds 3 23 Min Speed Hev 6 Hins 3 28 Preset Speed 5 158 Discrete Speeds 3 23 Minimum Diameter 799 Diameter Calc 3 39 Preset Speed 6 159 Discrete Speeds 323 Minimum Speed Hnis aes Preset Speed 7 160 Discrete Speeds 3 23 MOP Accel Time 22 Ramp Rates 3 28 Ramp Delay 20 Ramp Rates 328 MOP Dec Active 397 Diagnostics 3 48 3 74 Programming and Parameters Name No Group Page Name No Group Page Ramp In 110 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale5 In Abs 1244 Scale Blocks 3 39 Ramp In Pct 111 Speed Meters 3 11 Scaled In Max 1240 Scale Blocks 3 38 Ramp In Zero En 1265 Stop Modes 31 Scale5 In Min 1241 Scale Blocks 3 38 Ramp Out 113 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale5 In Off 1242 Scale Blocks 3 39 Ramp Out Pct 114 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale5 Input 1237 Scale Blocks 3 38 Ramp Select 0 403 Diagnostics 3 49 Scale5 Mul 1238 Scale Blocks 3 38 Ramp Select 1 404 Diagnostics 3 49 Scale5 Out Off 1243 Scale Blocks 3 39 Ramp Type Select 18 Ramp Rates 3 28 Scale5 Output 1236 Scale Blocks 3 38 Rated Motor Volt 175 Motor Data 14 Scale6 Div 1248 Scale Blocks 3 38 Real FF PID 418 PID Control 3 35 Scale6 In Abs 1253 Scale Blocks 3 39 Ref Line Speed
143. e to the Control Circuits page 2 3 Verify the Control Voltages page 2 4 Load the Default Settings page 2 5 Configure the Most Commonly Used Parameters page 2 5 Tune the Current Regulator page 2 8 VD 0 I Dn A U N Verify Motor Rotation and Run Feedback Polarity Checks page 2 9 10 Configure the Speed Feedback Parameters page 2 12 11 Tune the Speed Regulator page 2 13 OCOC COCCO COC OCCO DC O 12 Verify Speed Reference Settings and Drive Operation page 2 14 2 2 Drive Start Up Before Applying Power to the Drive 1 Verify all Drive Configuration Settings 1 With the bottom cover removed from the drive refer to Removing the Drive Covers on page 1 7 verify that DIP switch S14 is set correctly to be the rated field current specified on the motor nameplate Refer to Table 1 H on page 1 21 2 Verify all switch settings S9 S10 and S11 for the analog inputs Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 3 Verify all DIP switch and jumper settings for the digital encoder or analog tachometer feedback device Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 and Figure 1 30 on page 1 30 incorrectly or the tachometer is wired incorrectly Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The Drive can overspeed if DIP switch S4 is set 2 Verify the Power Wiring Verify that the AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated v
144. each commanded speed 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 4 13 The motor is turning the wrong direction 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 4 13 The motor reaches maximum speed immediately 0 0 00 c eee ee eee 4 14 Testpoint Codes and Functions 0 eee eect eens 4 14 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Supplemental Drive Information Specifications vias A 1 IP20 NEMA UL Type Open Watts Loss 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee A 4 Communication Configurations 0 0 00 eect rann A 4 Typical Programmable Controller Configurations 0 0 00 e eee eee A 4 Logic Command Status Words 0 0 cece eee neces A 5 Drive Power Circuit Protection 0 0 00 ccc cece eee ene n nes A 7 Frame A and B Fuse Information 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee A 7 Frame C Fuse Information 0 0 0 e e a o eee nea A 11 Control Power Circuit Protection Fuses 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eens A 14 AC Input Line Reactors and AC Input Contactors 2 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee A 16 DC Output Contactors and Dynamic Brake Resistor Kits ooooo ooooooo o A 18 HIM Overview External and Internal Connections 0 000 cece teen nee B 1 LCD Display Elements ses cass deen e bea age hese heiste sad hase adams B 1 ALT FUNCIONS cien od de Fee cs an B 2 Using the S M A R T List Screen a sooo ror a oA E A ee eens B 2 Menu Structure aiae e ena dared ae Cea ek Oe cas ae at de B 3 Viewing and Editing Parameters
145. ed by Par 187 Adaptive Joint 2 3 32 Group Adaptv Regulator Programming and Parameters No 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Adaptive Joint 1 Defines a range above and below the value set in Par 184 Adaptive Spd 1 within which there is a linear change in gain from parameter set 1 to parameter set 2 in order to prevent jumps in the adaptive speed regulator The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined Par 45 Max Ref Speed Adaptive Joint 2 Defines a range above and below the value set in Par 185 Adaptive Spd 2 with in which there is a linear change in gain from parameter set 2 to parameter set 3 in order to prevent jumps in the adaptive speed regulator The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined Par 45 Max Ref Speed Adaptive P Gain1 Proportional gain for the range from zero to the value set in Par 184 Adaptive Spd 1 The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined in Par 93 Spd Reg Kp Base Adaptive Gain1 Integral gain for the range from zero to Par 184 Adaptive Spd 1 The value in this parameter is defined as percentage of the value defined Par 94 Spd Reg Ki Base Adaptive P Gain2 Proportional gain for the range of values defined beginning with the value of Par 184 Adaptive Spd 1 to the value define
146. ee page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 209 Save HIM Ref Enables a feature to save the present reference value issued by the HIM to drive memory when a power loss occurs The value is restored to the HIM at power up Bit 0 At Pwr Down 0 Do not save 1 Save at power down SB 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1818 6 2 2 jefe e l2 g e 2 fe le 2 Je e e fg 2121818 218 218 1412 218 218 7276 o Ko oO oO 0 E E E 0 E 0C 0 0 E E E M lt Defaut x x Xx kK KK x x Ix Xx XK x ox kx x Xx 1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 110 9 8 7 6 5 4 B 2 1 0 210 Man Ref Preload Enabled Enables disables a feature to automatically load the present Auto Options Disabled frequency reference value into the HIM when Manual is selected Enabled Allows smooth speed transition from Auto to Manual 249 Save MOP Ref 2 Enables Disables the feature that saves the present MOP frequency reference at power down or at stop 5 Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input 2 e Bit 0 At Pwr Down When set to 0 Do not save 1 Save e Bit 1 At Stop When set to 0 Do not save 1 Save E AC O lo 0 10 0 GT b b wis d a i L I S L LILL IL ILL la 7 l is o o olo 18 io lolo o Jo lo glz 818 8 8 2 28 12 28 18 818 8 2 18 2 XX E E E MM CC CC E CC E E E lt X lt Defaut x x x XX Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx x 0 0
147. eld Reg Enable 497 Fld Weaken Ratio 456 Fld Reg KiBase 98 Field Economy En 499 Fld Reg Kp 91 Set Fld Curve 919 Field Econ Delay 1407 Fld Reg Ki 92 Reset Fld Curve 920 Field Mode Sel 469 Force Min Field 498 Fld Const 40 Pct 916 Max Flid Curr Pct 467 Out Volt Level 921 Fld Const 70 Pct 917 Min Fld Curr Pct 468 Fld Reg Kp Base 97 Fld Const 90 Pct 918 Torq Attributes Current Limit 7 Torque Reduction 342 TrqTpr Lim2 753 Current Lim Pos 8 Zero Torque 353 TrqTpr Lim3 754 Current Lim Neg 9 TrqTpr Enable 750 TrqTpr Lim4 755 Torque Ref 39 TrqTpr_Limo 751 TrqTpr_Spd 756 Trim Torque 40 TrqTpr_Lim1 752 Filt Torq Cur 926 Speed Feedback Fdbk Device Type 414 Spd Fdbk Error 455 Z Channel Enable 911 Anlg Tach Gain 562 Act Spd Filter 923 Z Capture Pos En 912 Anlg Tach Zero 563 Encoder PPR 169 Z Captured Pos 913 Spd Fdbk Control 457 Encoder Out Sel 1021 SpdReg FB Bypass 458 Encoder Err Chk 652 Autotune Autotune Cur Lim 1048 Speed Tune Dir 1029 I Reg Error 587 CurrReg Autotune 452 Speed Tune Kp 1032 Inertia C Filter 1012 Arm Resistance 453 Speed Tune Ki 1033 Torque Const 1013 Arm Inductance 454 Spd Tune Inertia 1030 Inertia 1014 Spd Reg Autotune 1027 SpdTune Friction 1031 Friction 1015 Test Generator TstGen Output 58 TstGen Amplitude 60 TstGen Offset 61 TstGen Frequency 59 on Command Limits Minimum Speed 1 Min Speed Rev 6 Max Speed Fwd 3 Min Speed
148. er corresponds to the digital input output number e g digital input 3 uses UsrDefBitWrdA3 Relay Outputs 1 and 2 use bits 14 and 15 respectively 1 2 1 M 5 32 Nm mn a I o A 2 1024 212 4096 o0oo0o00 000 1 000 0 Programming and Parameters 3 55 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values UsrDefBitWrdA0 Default UsrDefBitWrdA1 o lUstDSIBIWrdA2 Min Max 0 1 UsrDefBitWrdA3 UsrDefBitWrdA4 UsrDefBitWrdA5 UsrDefBitWrdA6 UsrDefBitWrdA7 UsrDefBitWrdA8 UsrDefBitWrdA9 UsrDefBitWrdA10 UsrDefBitWrdA11 UsrDefBitWrdA12 UsrDefBitWrdA13 UsrDefBitWrdA14 UsrDefBitWrdA15 Bit variables The individual User Defined bits can be read or written to It is possible to process a word with Par 519 UsrDefBitWrdA see example Note You can read bits 0 7 of a digital input with Par 519 UsrDefBitWrdA and write all of the bits associated with UsrDefBitWrdA to a digital output 3 56 Programming and Parameters o 536 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions UsrDefBitWrdB A bitmap of Pars 537 UsrDefBitWrdBO through 552 UsrDefBitWrdB15 With a parameter it is possible to read or write all of the bits inside a word Example UsrDefBitWrdBO UsrDefBitWrdB1 UsrDefBitWrdB2 UsrDefBitWrdB3 UsrDefBitWrdB4 UsrDefBitWrdB5 UsrDefBitWrdB6
149. f A Auto 0 0 0 Port 0 TB 0 10 10 11 SpdRef B Auto 0 0 1 DPI Port 1 0 10 1 J0 Preset Spd 2 Auto 0 1 0 DPI Port 2 E 0 10 1 1 Preset Spd 3 Auto 0 1 1 DPI Port 3 0 1 0 0 Preset Spd 4 Auto 1 0 0 DPI Port 4 gt 0 1 10 1 Preset Spd 5 Auto 1 0 1 DPI Port 5 0 1 1 J0 Preset Spd 6 Auto 1 1 0 DPI Port 6 O 1 1 1 Preset Spd7 Auto 1 1 1 No Local Control 1 10 O 0 TB Manual 1 10 10 1 DPIPort 1 Manual 1 10 1 10 DPI Port 2 Manual 1 10 1 11 DPI Port 3 Manual 1 1 10 10 DPI Port 4 Manual 1 1 10 1 DPI Port 5 Manual 1 1 1 10 DPI Port 6 Manual 1 11 11 1 Jog Ref 382 Drive Status 2 Read Only Present operating condition of the drive Bit 0 Ready When set 1 the drive is ready Bit 1 Active When set the drive is active Bit 2 Running When set the drive is running Bit 3 Jogging When set the drive is being jogged Bit 4 Stopping When set the drive is stopping Bit 6 Auto Tuning When set the drive is auto tuning 2 38 8 3883882855828 3 158 589 18 8 5 8 9 Jo LIES lt lt SL 3 8 8 818 8 8 8 8 8 5 5 2 9 5 35 8 E E E E E ON II E lt lt O oO S E lt lt E Defaut xXx x x x x xXx xix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 f Bit 15 114 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 48 Programming and Parameters o 393 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions
150. f the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss gt Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures gt amp PowerFlex DriveExplorer DriveTools SP DPI and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Klixon is a registered trademark of Sensata Technologies Inc Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex Digital DC Drive User Manual publication 20 UMOO1 since the last release
151. ffered from the power system transients The control power of many drives can be fed from a single source as long as proper distribution protection is provided General Grounding Requirements Installation and Wiring 1 11 The drive Safety Ground PE must be connected to system ground Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked For installations within a cabinet a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point bar requirements of the CE Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC PowerFlex DC drives may not be powered from a corner earthed TN with one phase earthed supply system Although PowerFlex DC drives are compliant with the requirements of the CE Low Voltage Directive when powered from an IT or impedance earthed supply system power must be removed from the drive as soon as possible after an earth fault is detected in the power system to satisfy CE safety requirements related to the insulation system of the drive ATTENTION In order to comply with the essential Figure 1 9 Typical Grounding os Earth 2 OS lt a gt 2 ae eS a APA B 5 4 o L3 All wires inc
152. fter the value in Par 1043 Anlg Int Cmp Err has been reached before Par 1045 Anlg In1 Cmp Eq transitions Anlg Ini Cmp Eq Provides an indication after the amount of time specified in Par 1044 Anlg In1 Cmp Dly has elapsed when the value set in parameter 1043 Anlg Ini Cmp Err has been reached e 0 The value of analog input 1 is above or below the value set in Par 1043 Anlg In1 Cmp Err e 1 The value of analog input 1 is within the range set in Par 1043 Anlg Int Cmp Err Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital output Values Default Min Max Default Options Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max 0 32768 32767 0 Ready 0 Ready 1 Tune 0 Assigned 0 Assigned 1 Not Assigned 0 0 1000 ms 0 10000 0 0 10000 0 0 65000 ms Read Only 0 1 Related 1043 1044 1045 1042 1044 1045 1042 1043 1045 1042 1043 1044 File INPUT OUTPUT Group Analog Inputs Analog Outputs 1404 1405 1406 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Analog In1 Value Value of the signal at analog input 1 Units based on the value f set in Par 71 Anlg In1 Con Analog In2 Value gl Value of the signal at analo
153. function is automatically disabled when the armature feedback has been selected Par 414 Fdbk Device Type 3 Armature A SpdReg FB Bypass Enables Disables an automatic switch to armature feedback when the Encoder Loss F91 fault occurs due to an encoder or tachometer feedback loss When this parameter is set to Enable Par 478 Spd Loss Fit Cfg must be set to 1 Alarm After an automatic switch to armature feedback the speed regulator works with Pars 459 SpdReg Kp Bypass and 460 SpdReg Ki Bypass and the D derivative part of the speed regulator is automatically excluded Pars SpdReg Kp Bypass and SpdReg Ki Bypass must be properly tuned An automatic switch to armature feedback can only be accomplished when running the motor with constant field current Anlg Tach Gain Fine scaling of the speed feedback received from the DC analog tachometer Par 414 Fdbk Device Type 2 DC Tach The voltage feedback value received from the tachometer is multiplied by this value Anlg Tach Zero Offset scaling of the feedback circuit Encoder Err Chk Enables Disables monitoring of the digital encoder connection status When an alarm is detected the HIM displays the Encoder Loss F91 fault This parameter can be programmed on a digital output This function is activated by setting Par 457 Spd Fdbk Control Enabled Values Default Min Max Default Options
154. g and Parameters 0 0 Disabled 0 1408 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Default Min Max 0 0 Disabled 0 1408 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Default Min Max Default Min Max 610 610 617 Read Only 42 Determines which ports can control the drive when Par 1377 Write Mask Act bit 15 is set to 1 If the bit for a port is set to 0 the port will have no control functions except for stop 0 Control Masked 1 Control Permitted x Reserved silo lo io le lo oe jo io lo PT Oe NX 7 le 2 2 JE EE EEE EE 5 B IE 5 5 S D io o io o o io o o io A 0 jA A 0 g 8 8 o ls lg lols lo 8 8 ja ja 1 1 1 gt C O je E E E je E je E jaja ja ja O O Default x x x X Xx Xx Xx Xx x x 1 1 1 1 fo Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Logic Mask Act Read Only Indicates the status of the logic mask for the DPI ports When bit 15 is set network security is controlling the logic mask instead of Par 591 Logic Mask 0 Control Masked 1 Control Permitted x Reserved F M N o ol im ji fH Im fo N 7 e fo jn fe 8 5 5 5 5 5 515512 15 5 5 15 5 5 S a ja ja ja ja ja ja ja S E E e
155. g input 2 Units based on the value set in Par 76 Anlg In2 Config Analog In3 Value Value of the signal at analog input 3 Units based on the value set in Par 81 Anlg In3 Config Anlg Outi Scale Anlg Out2 Scale Anlg Out3 Scale Anlg Out4 Scale Scaling of the analog outputs Anlg Outi Sel Anlg Out2 Sel Anlg Out3 Sel Anlg Out4 Sel Selects the source of the value that drives the analog output This parameter is used to configure the analog output on the I O Expansion circuit board Options Values Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Default Default Default Default Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Programming and Parameters Read Only 20 00 Vor mA Read Only 20 00 VormA Read Only 20 00 VormA 1 00 10 00 12 Motor Speed Motor Curr 18 Fld Current 14 Motor Volts 0 Off Not used 12 Motor Speed Par 121 24 Field Ref Par 500 1 Spd Ref Out Par 385 13 Motor Curr Par 199 25 PID Output Par 774 2 Trim Ramp Par 42 14 Motor Volts Par 233 26 Out Volt Lvl Par 921 3 Ramp In Par 110 15 Analog In 1 Par 70 27 Fld Cur Max Par 467 4 Ramp Out Par 113 16 Analog In 2 Par 75 28 Filtered Spd
156. gital output matches the state of bit 5 Decelerating of Par 381 Drive Status 1 and the state of Par 1189 Decel Status Brake Cmd Energized 1 at run opens the brake after the value in Par 1263 Opening Delay has been exceeded De energized 0 at stop closes the brake after the drive speed goes below the value of Par 1262 Closing Speed ContactorDB 1 issues the close command to the main contactor and dynamic brake contactor Contactor 1 issues the close command to the main contactor Alarm 0 indicates that a drive alarm has occurred Refer to Par 1380 Drive Alarm 1 Running 1 indicates that the drive is active in Run mode The state of the assigned digital output matches the state of bit 2 Running of Par 381 Drive Status 1 Jogging 4 indicates that the drive is active in Jog mode The state of the assigned digital output matches the state of bit 3 Jogging of Par 381 Drive Status 1 Active 1 indicates that the drive is active in Run or Jog mode The state of the assigned digital output matches the state of bit 1 Active of Par 381 Drive Status 1 Related File Group INPUT OUTPUT Digital Outputs Programming and Parameters 3 69 D Parameter Name Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol
157. guration of DIP switch 54 Refer to DC Analog Tachometer DIP Switch S4 Example on page 1 30 Drive Start Up Checklist Chapter 2 Drive Start Up This chapter describes how to start up the PowerFlex DC drive The drive is configured at the factory for speed regulation with encoder feedback and independant motor field current regulation with constant current to control the motor from zero to base speed If using the LCD HIM Human Interface Module to commission the drive it is recommended that you read Appendix B before performing these procedures following start up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages Correct the malfunction before continuing ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the Important It is recommended that you uncouple the motor from all loads at this time until otherwise directed This checklist contains the major steps required to complete the drive commissioning procedure p Verify all Drive Configuration Settings page 2 2 Verify the Power Wiring page 2 2 Verify the Control and I O Wiring page 2 2 Apply Voltag
158. he Speed Regulator as a percentage of Par 45 Max Ref Speed Speed Reg In Total reference value input to the Speed Regulator in RPM Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Spd Feedback Pet Actual speed as a percentage of the Par 45 Max Ref Speed Note This parameter is assigned to analog output 1 terminals 21 and 22 Par 66 Anlg Out1 Sel by default but can be assigned to any analog output Spd Feedback Actual speed in RPM Spd Ref Out Pct Output of the Speed Reference selection as a percentage of Par 45 Max Ref Speed Speed Ref Out Output of the Speed Reference selection Encoder Speed Actual speed measured by the digital encoder Values Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters Read Only Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 1 The value of Max Ref Speed cannot exceed 8192 RPM Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Read Only 100 00 Read Only Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 1 The value of Max Ref Speed cannot exceed 8192 RPM Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Read Only 100 00 Read Onl
159. he drive to Stop 2 wire control Run Forward Issues a Run command in the Forward direction Run Reverse ssues a Run command in the Reverse direction Run Level Level sensitive Run command no off to on transition required RunFwd Level Run Level command in the Forward direction RunRev Level Run Level command in the Reverse direction Jog Starts the drive and runs at the speed in Par 266 Jog Speed removal causes the drive to Stop Jog Forward ssues a Jog command in the Forward direction Jog Reverse ssues a Jog command in the Reverse direction Aux Fault Asserting causes an Auxiliary Input fault F2 Clear Faults ssues a Clear Faults command Auto Manual Selects between Automatic and Manual speed reference values Speed Sel 1 3 Selects one of eight speed references Bit enumerations 000 Par 44 Speed Ref A 001 Par 48 Speed Ref B 010 Par 155 Preset Speed 2 011 Par 156 Preset Speed 3 100 Par 157 Preset Speed 4 101 Par 158 Preset Speed 5 110 Par 159 Preset Speed 6 111 Par 160 Preset Speed 7 PI Enable Enables disables the PI block of the PID regulator Par 769 Enable PI PI Hold Enables disables a hold on the PI output PI Reset Asserting causes a reset of the PI output PI Invert Asserting causes an inversion of the PI output Loc
160. he following parameters 1 Par 660 Accel Time 1 Set the desired acceleration ramp time 1 Par 662 Decel Time 1 Set the desired deceleration ramp time 11 Tune the Speed Regulator The speed regulator auto tuning test detects the total inertia value of the motor shaft in Kg m the friction value in N m and the calculation of the proportional P and integral I gains of the speed regulator motor shaft combined with the load The auto tuning test of the speed loop cannot be carried out on machines with a limited stroke A ATTENTION This test requires the free rotation of the Important The test is carried out by using the torque limit value set in the Par 1048 Autotune Cur Lim recommended value 20 The torque reference is applied via a step reference without a ramp therefore there must not be any backlash in the mechanical transmission and it must be compatible with those operations using the torque limit value set in the Par 1048 Autotune Cur Lim You can modify the torque limit value via this parameter Important In applications where the system total inertia value is very high 1t is necessary to increase the value of Par 1048 Autotune Cur Lim in order to avoid Time out errors The speed regulator auto tuning test of the speed loop is not suitable for drives used in elevator and or lifting system applications 1 While still in the Autotune group configure the motor
161. he motor ramps down to 0 speed and then to full speed in the opposite direction 5 Press the Stop button on the HIM and verify that the drive ramps to 0 speed and stops Auto Tuning Faults Following is a list of faults that may display during the speed regulator auto tuning test In some cases the drive s control circuits may detect a value s that is out of range for the configuration settings during the speed regulator auto tuning test In these cases make the suggested adjustments and repeat the test If the fault occurs again complete the Fine Tuning the Regulators procedures beginning on page C 22 Fault STune Overspeed No 56 Description The measured motor speed is too high during the speed regulator auto tuning procedure Action Decrease the value of Par 1048 Autotune Cur Lim and repeat the auto tune procedure STune Stalled 57 The drive stalled during the Increase the value of Par 1048 speed regulator auto tuning Autotune Cur Lim and repeat the procedure auto tune procedure STune LoadHi 58 The loading torque value is too Decrease the load torque where high at zero speed to complete applicable and repeat the auto the speed regulator auto tuning tune procedure procedure STune CurLimit 59 The value of Par 1048 Autotune Decrease the value of Par 1048 Cur Lim for auto tuning the Autotune Cur Lim and repeat the speed regulator is set too high auto tune
162. his parameter can be assigned to a digital input PID Feedback Analog input feedback value received from the transducer position dancer or tension load cell PID Output Sign Determines whether the output of the PID regulator is bipolar or positive clamp of the negative side PID Output Scale Scale factor for Par 774 PID Output The value of this parameter depends on to which parameter you want to send the PID regulator output PID Output Displays the PID regulator output Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output in order to provide a cascaded reference in multi drive systems Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Related 10000 759 763 0 10000 770 Read Only 10000 Read Only 10000 0 763 10000 0 763 10000 Setpoint 0 Setpoint 0 Setpoint 1 Positive Bipolar 00 774 100 00 Read Only 10000 Programming and Parameters 3 37 s g 3 Parameter Name Description amp amp seepage 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 782 PID Target Default 0 Not Used
163. hometer set the fine scaling value in Par 562 Anlg Tach Gain This value is used to scale the analog tachometer feedback signal after it has been conditioned by the drive hardware S4 is set incorrectly or the tach is wired incorrectly Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the drive or process equipment Refer to Figure 1 30 on page 1 30 ATTENTION The drive can overspeed if DIP switch 1 If the speed feedback source is a digital encoder enter the pulses per revolution from the encoder nameplate in Par 169 Encoder PPR l If the speed feedback source is a digital encoder set Par 652 Encoder Err Chk to 1 Enabled to activate monitoring of the digital encoder signals verifies the presence of the A B A B signals Par 457 Spd Fdbk Control must be set to 1 Enabled for encoder monitoring to occur Switch S20 must be set correctly to prevent Encoder faults Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 Access the Speed Command file and press Enter With the Limits group selected press Enter and configure the following parameters 3 Par 1 Minimum Speed Enter the minimum speed reference limit J Par 2 Maximum Speed Enter the maximum speed required by the application this can be above the motor base speed if field weakening is used Drive Start Up 2 13 4 Access the Dynamic Control file and press Enter 5 Access the Ramp Rates group and configure t
164. ically set at 10000 8000 1000 1250 PID Steady Delay The amount of time for which the gains in Pars 793 PI Init Prop Gn and 734 PI Init Intgl Gn will remain enabled after feed forward has exceeded the threshold value defined in Par 695 PI Steady Thrsh PI Init Intgl Gn The initial value of the integral gain This parameter is active when feed forward is greater than the value defined in Par 695 Pl Steady Thrsh or Par 769 Enable PI transitions from 0 low to 1 high and the amount of time defined in Par 731 PID Steady Delay has elapsed Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Programming and Parameters Read Only 10000 1 00 0 00 100 00 0 1 1000 ms 10 00 0 00 100 00 Disabled Enabled 0 0 100 0 10 0 0 0 100 0 10 0 0 0 100 0 1 00 0 00 100 00 Read Only 10000 0 0 60000 ms 10 00 0 00 100 00 3 35 Related 181 181 181 181 181 181 758 771 695 734 793 695 731 769 3 36 File APPLICATIONS Group PID Control Programming and Parameters No 757 758 759 760 761 763 773 774 Parameter Nam
165. ig In Term 6 570 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fault 10 Time 1370 Faults 3 52 Dig In Term 7 571 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fault 2 Code 1352 Faults 3 52 Dig In Term 8 572 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fault 2 Time 1362 Faults 3 52 Dig In Term 9 573 Digital Inputs 3 66 Fault 3 Code 1353 Faults 3 52 Dig Out Status 581 Digital Outputs 3 69 Fault 3 Time 1363 Faults 3 52 Digital Int Sel 133 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 4 Code 1354 Faults 3 52 Digital In10 Sel 142 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 4 Time 1364 Faults 3 52 Digital In11 Sel 143 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 5 Code 1355 Faults 3 52 Digital In12 Sel 144 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 5 Time 1365 Faults 3 52 Digital In2 Sel 134 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 6 Code 1356 Faults 3 52 Digital In3 Sel 135 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 6 Time 1366 Faults 3 52 Digital In4 Sel 136 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 7 Code 1357 Faults 3 52 Digital In5 Sel 137 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 7 Time 1367 Faults 3 52 Digital In6 Sel 138 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 8 Code 1358 Faults 3 52 Digital In7 Sel 139 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 8 Time 1368 Faults 3 52 Digital In8 Sel 140 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 9 Code 1359 Faults 3 52 Digital In9 Sel 141 Digital Inputs 3 64 Fault 9 Time 1369 Faults 3 52 Digital Out1 Sel 145 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Arm Amps 1371 Faults 3 52 Digital Out2 Sel 146 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Clear 1347 Faults 3 51 Digital Out3 Sel 147 Digital Outputs 3 67 Fault Clr Mask 597 Masks amp Owners 3
166. ignal of 0 20 mA is connected to the analog input The signal must be positive e 4 to 20mA A current signal of 4 20 mA is connected to the analog input The signal must be positive 72 Anlg In1 Scale Default 1 00 o 77 Anlg In2 Scale 82 Anlg In3 Scale Min Max aN Scales the value in the corresponding Anlg Inx Sel parameter 73 Anlgi Tune Scale Default 1 00 o 78 Anlg2 Tune Scale 83 Anlg3 Tune Scale Min Max 0 10 10 00 Fine tuning of the analog input when the maximum signal does not correspond exactly to the rated value Scales according to the following equation Anlg Inx Sel Anlg Inx Offset x Anlg Inx Scale x Ainx Tune Scale 3 62 INPUT OUTPUT Analog Inputs Programming and Parameters 261 295 296 297 792 1042 1043 1044 1045 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Anlg Ini Offset Anlg In2 Offset Anlg In3 Offset Offset value for the analog inputs If the input has an offset or if the variable assigned to the input already has a value although there is no input signal present this can be compensated for via the value in this parameter Anlg In1 Tune Anlg In2 Tune Anlg In3 Tune Automatic fine tuning of the analog inputs If this command is given parameter Ainx Tune Scale is automatically selected so that the input signal present normally full scale corresponds to the maximum vari
167. ime Fault 5 Time Fault 6 Time Fault 7 Time Fault 8 Time Fault 9 Time Fault 10 Time The time between initial drive power up and the occurrence of the associated trip fault Fault Arm Amps Captures and displays the armature current as a percentage of rated current at the time of the last fault Fault Speed Captures and displays the output speed rpm of the drive at the time of the last fault Fault Field Amps Captures and displays the field current as a percentage of rated current at the time of the last fault Fault Voltage Captures and displays the armature voltage at the time of the last fault OverVolt Fit Cfg Determines the response of the drive to an overvoltage condition F5 Arm Overvoltage Note Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of alarm and fault descriptions Aux Inp Fit Cfg Determines the response of the drive to an external fault condition F2 Auxiliary Input i e no voltage at the digital input terminal assigned to Digital Inx Sel with a value of 14 Aux Fault Note Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of alarm and fault descriptions OverTemp Fit Cfg Determines the response of the drive to a motor over temperature condition F16 Motor Over Temp Note Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of alarm and fault descriptions FldLoss Fit Cfg Determines the response of the drive to a field loss condition F6 Fld Current Loss If Par 497 Field Reg Enable is
168. ime 1 662 MOP Accel Time 22 Ramp Type Select 18 Accel Time 2 24 MOP Decel Time 30 i Accel Time 1 660 Decel Time 2 32 S Curve Time 19 Restart Modes Start At Powerup 1344 Powerup Delay 1345 Utility Reference Config Direction Mode 1322 Man Ref Preload 210 MOP Select 1375 Save HIM Ref 209 Save MOP Ref 249 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 211 Reset Defaults 258 Diagnostics Drive Status 1 381 Start Inhibits 1403 At Zero Speed 395 Drive Status 2 382 Drive Logic Rslt 1328 CurrLimit Active 349 Last Stop Source 1402 At Speed 394 Spd Limit Active 372 Faults Clear Fault Que 263 Status2 at Fault 1350 Fault Voltage 1374 Fault Clear 1347 Fault Arm Amps 1371 Fault 1 Code 1351 Fault Clr Mode 1348 Fault Speed 1372 Status1 at Fault 1349 Fault Field Amps 1373 Alarms Drive Alarm 1 1380 Programming and Parameters 3 5 File Group Parameters Communications Comm Control DPI Baud Rate 589 DPI Fdbk Select 1321 DPI Port Value 1343 gt DPI Port Sel 590 Masks amp Owners Logic Mask 591 MOP Mask 598 Reference Owner 604 Start Mask 592 Local Mask 599 Accel Owner 605 Jog Mask 593 Decel Mask 631 Fault Clr Owner 606 Direction Mask 594 Stop Owner 600 MOP Owner 607 Reference Mask 595 Start Owner 601 Local Owner 608 Accel Mask 596 Jog Owner 602 Decel Owner 609 Fault Clr Mask 597 Direction Owner 603 Datalinks Data In A1 610 Data In D1 616 Data Out C1
169. ime PID Control 37 768 PD Prop Gain 1 PD Control 3 35 1047 PID Decel Time PID Control 3 37 769 Enable Pl PI Control 3 33 1048 Autotune Cur Lim Auto Tune 3 21 770 Enable PD PD Control 3 35 1052 Output Power Drive Data 3 13 771 PI Output PI Control 3 33 1153 Max Diameter Diameter Calc 3 40 772 PID Output Sign PID Control 3 36 1154 Roll Diameter Diameter Calc 3 40 773 PID Output Scale PID Control 3 36 1155 Line Spd Thresh Diameter Calc 3 40 774 PID Output PID Control 3 36 1156 Line Spd Gain Diameter Calc 3 40 776 PI Central vi PI Contro 3 33 1157 Diameter Reset Diameter Calc 3 40 777 PI Central v2 PI Contro 33 1158 Diam Threshold Diameter Calc 3 40 778 PI Central v3 PI Contro 3 33 1159 Diameter Reached Diameter Calc 3 40 779 PI Central v sel PI Contro 3 34 1160 Line Speed Pct Diameter Calc 3 40 780 _ Pl Central vs0 PI Contro 3 34 1161 Diam Calc Dis Diameter Calc 40 781 PI Central vs1 PI Contro 3 34 1162 Diameter Filter Diameter Calc 3 40 782 PID Target PID Control 3 37 1163 Base Omega Diameter Calc 3 40 783 Pl integr freeze PI Contro 3 34 1164 Diam Preset 0 Diameter Calc 3 40 784 PI Upper Limit PI Contro 3 34 1165 Diam Preset 1 Diameter Calc 3 40 785 PI Lower Limit PI Contro 3 34 1166 Diam Preset 2 Diameter Calc 3 41 786 PID Source PID Control 3 37 1167 Diam Preset 3 Diameter Calc 3 41 787 PID Source Gain PID Control 3 37 1168 Diam Preset Sel Diameter Calc 3 41 788 PD Prop Gain 2 PD Control 3 35 1171 Variable J C
170. inuous type 1 alarm condition exists Check Drive Running parameter 1380 Drive Alarm 1 Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4 4 and or Alarm Descriptions on page 4 7 Red Flashing A fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or view the Fault Queue on the HIM Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4 4 Steady Anon resettable non configurable fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or view the Fault Queue on the HIM Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4 4 O PORT Refer to the Communication Status of DPI port internal communications if present MOD Adapter User Manual Status of communications module when installed NET Status of network if connected NET B Status of secondary network if connected 5 Verify the Control Voltages l Verify that the following voltages are present at I O terminal block 1 and 2 Refer to I O Signal and Control Wiring on page 1 31 Terminal Number Voltage to Terminal Number 7 10V 9 8 10V 9 19 24 30V 18 Drive Start Up 2 5 6 Load the Default Settings It is recommended that you reset the drive to the default settings By resetting the drive to the default settings any previous parameter modifications you have made will be overwritten 1 On the HIM from the Main menu scroll to the Memory Storage menu and press Enter 2 Scroll to Reset To Defaults and press Enter A message displays to verify that you want to reset the drive to the factory
171. ion must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins Important The PowerFlex DC drive is not designed for use with multiple motor applications for proper installation Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide Operating Conditions and Temperatures PowerFlex DC drives are designed to operate at 0 to 50 C surrounding air temperature without derating The drive must be mounted in a clean dry location Contaminants such as oils corrosive vapors and abrasive debris must be kept out of the enclosure NEMA UL Type Open IP20 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against contact with enclosed equipment These enclosures offer no protection against airborne contaminants 1 2 Installation and Wiring Minimum Mounting Clearances Minimum clearance requirements indicated in Figure 1 1 are intended to be from drive to drive Other objects can occupy this space however reduced airflow may cause protection circuits to fault the drive The drive must be mounted in a vertical orientation as shown bel
172. istor and 78 amp 79 0 140 1 500 Thermal Switches Figure 1 20 Frame A Relay and Thermistor Thermal Switch Terminal Block Locations 21 22 23 26 25 26 27 2829 30 31 32 39 34 35 36 37 28 IN C CeCe Cf NDD DENN 12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Note Terminals 78 and 79 shown with 1k ohm resistor in 78 79 35 36 75 76 place of temperature sensor Installation and Wiring 1 23 Figure 1 21 Frame B Relay and Thermistor Thermal Switch Terminal Block Locations METTET ICE 30 37 28 28 60 78 79 35 36 75 76 Figure 1 22 Frame C Relay and Thermistor Thermal Switch Terminal Block Locations RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DISCONNECT INPUT POWER BEFORE SERVICING EQUIPMENT 35 36 75 76 7 H U2 V2 PE 35 36 75 76 78 79 1 24 Installation and Wiring Control Circuit Input Power The control circuit must be powered by an external 230V AC or 115V AC single phase power supply For frame B and C drives only a jumper is required between terminals SA and SB for 115V AC control input power For frame B drive SA SB terminal block location refer to Figure 1 26 on page 1 25 For frame C drive SA SB terminal block location refer to Figure 1 27 on page 1 26 Figure 1 23 Frame A Control Circuit Terminal Block Location 0 wt Figure 1 24 Frame B Control Circuit Terminal Block Location 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 30 39 40 sover ee isete G 22 29 24 2
173. ive size 16 15 Configuration of the control circuit board to the appropriate drive size Armature Leave set to the factory setting unless the control board has been current supplied as a spare part Refer to Table 1 0 on page 1 30 and Table based on 1 P on page 1 31 for switch configuration based on drive current rating drive size code O 18 Not used Leave set to the factory setting Off S20 Monitoring of the Z channel of the Digital Encoder on connector XE2 On Off Position Z channel monitored On Position Z channel not monitored 21 Encoder power supply voltage and input selection 12 15 V Note When control power is supplied to the drive the appropriate LED lights to indicate the selection of the switch ENC_5 5 V encoder 2 5 5 4V input range ENC_12 12 15 V encoder 5 4V 15 2V input range 1 30 Installation and Wiring incorrectly or the tachometer is wired incorrectly Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The Drive can overspeed if DIP switch S4 is set Figure 1 30 DC Analog Tachometer DIP Switch S4 Example ON DIP Note Illustration for example only Table 1 N DC Analog Tachometer DIP Switch S4 Configuration Maximum DC S4 1 S4 2 S4 3 S4 4 Input Voltage S4 8 S4 7 S4 6 S4 5 22V ON ON ON ON 45V ON ON ON OFF 90V ON ON OFF OFF 180V ON OFF
174. l descriptions Spd Select 1 Indicates the state of the assigned digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 18 Speed Sel 2 Refer to Option Definitions for Digital Inx Sel on page 3 65 for instructions on how to set digital input speed selects to different speed references e 0 Digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 18 Speed Sel 2 not asserted e 1 Digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 18 Speed Sel 2 asserted Note By default the state of this parameter is determined by digital input 6 Spd Select 2 Indicates the state of the assigned digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 19 Speed Sel 3 Refer to Option Definitions for Digital Inx Sel on page 3 65 for instructions on how to set digital input speed selects to different speed references e 0 Digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 19 Speed Sel 3 not asserted e 1 Digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 19 Speed Sel 3 asserted Note By default the state of this parameter is determined by digital input 7 Ramp Select 0 Indicates the state of the assigned digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 25 Acc2 amp Dec2 or 26 Accel 2 e 0 Accel 1 ramp rate is selected e 1 Accel 2 ramp rate is selected Note This parameter can be assigned to indicate the state of a digital input Ramp Select 1 Indicates the state of the assigned digital input Digital Inx Sel set to 25 Ac
175. lar Speed e Configure for Voltage or Reference Current 0 to 10V Input Common 71 Anlg Int Config or 7 4 e Adjust Scaling 0 to 20 mA 5 72 Anlg Int Scale and lg 73 Anlg1 Tune Scale 7 e View Signal Value 8 1404 Analog In1 Value 9 e View Signal Output 10 385 Speed Ref Out Analog Output Bipolar e Select Source Value Signal AQ 66 Anlg Out Sel H0V Bipolar based on the e Adjust Scaling signal of the selected input i e selection Analog In 1 0 10V 0 20mA Unipolar shown 62 Anlg Out1 Scale Enable Input 24V DC internal supply e No Changes Required Note If the digital input used for Enable is changed from the default setting of digital input 4 the wiring must be changed accordingly 2 Wire Control Non Reversing 24V DC internal supply Stop Run CMAN ODOAKR DD 20 e Disable Digital Input 1 133 Digital In1 Sel 0 Not Used e Set Digital Input 2 134 Digital In2 Sel 5 Run Input Output 2 Wire Control Connection Example Installation and Wiri
176. lator Min Max 32767 Torque Winder En Default Enables disables the center winder function Options 0 Disabled 1 1210 W Target Default 0 Parameter number of the speed reference address Min Max 0 65535 1213 Actual Comp Default Read Only Active compensation status sums up the static dynamic and inertial Min Max 200 frictions as a percentage of the drive rated current Units Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Closed Loop En Default 0 Disabled O Enables Disables closed loop tension control used with a load cell Options 0 Disabled Enabled Speed Demand En Default 0 Disabled Enables Disables the speed reference calculation for the Torque Options 0 Disabled Winder application 1 Enabled 1216 Spd match torque Default 100 Sets the torque current during the launching and change phase Min Max 0 200 Units 3 43 3 44 File APPLICATIONS Group Winder Functions Programming and Parameters No 1217 1255 1284 1285 1286 1287 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions W Reference Angular speed reference Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output 10V 100 of Par 45 Max Ref Speed Jog TW Speed Torque Winder jog reference The parameter is entered as a percentage of Par 1160 Line Speed Pct Jog TW Enable Enables Dis
177. ld Config 3 16 Drive Logic Rslt 1328 Diagnostics 3 50 Fld Const 90 Pct 918 Field Config 3 16 Drive Size 465 Drive Data 3 13 Fld Current Pct 234 forque Attribute 3 12 Drive Status 1 381 Diagnostics 3 47 Fld Reg Ki 92 Field Config 3 14 Drive Status 2 382 Diagnostics 3 47 Fld Reg Ki Base 98 Field Config 3 14 Drive Type 300 Drive Data 3 13 Fld Reg Kp 91 Field Config 3 14 Drive Type Sel 201 Motor Data 3 14 Fld Reg Kp Base 97 Field Config 3 14 Droop Filter 697 Load Limits 3 30 Fld Weaken Ratio 456 Field Config 3 15 Droop Limit 700 Load Limits 3 30 FidLoss Fit Cfg 473 Alarms 3 52 Droop Percent 696 Load Limits 3 30 Flying Start En 388 Speed Regulator 3 26 Drv Fld Brdg Cur 374 Motor Data 3 14 Force Min Field 498 Field Config 3 15 Dynamic Friction 1175 Winder Functions 3 41 Freeze Ramp 373 Ramp Rates 3 29 Elapsed Lifetime 235 Drive Data 3 13 Friction 1015 Autotune 3 20 Enable Droop 699 Load Limits 3 30 Gear Box Ratio 797 Diameter Calc 3 39 Programming and Parameters 3 73 Name No Group Page Name No Group Page Reg Error 587 Autotune 3 20 MOP Decel Time 30 Ramp Rates 3 28 ne
178. luding motor o eS ground must be connected c Transformer inside the motor terminal box Safety Ground Safety Ground PE This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code This point must be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist a floor ground rod or bus bar see above Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes 1 12 Installation and Wiring Power Circuit Protection Power Wiring Power Feeder Each power feeder from the substation transformer to the drive must be provided with properly sized ground cables The conduit or cable armor should be bonded to the substation ground at both ends Each transformer enclosure and or frame must be bonded to ground at a minimum of two locations Encoder Ground Connections If used must be routed in grounded steel conduit The conduit must be grounded at both ends Ground the cable shield at the motor end only Tachometer Ground Connections If used ground connections must be routed in grounded steel conduit The conduit must be grounded at both ends Ground the cable shield at the drive end only using the shield clamps on the grounded metal plate supporting the control board refer to I O Terminal Block Locations on page 1 32 for shield clamp location It is recommended that you install the PowerFlex DC drive with fast acting fuses to protect the armature converter on the
179. me Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Spd Reg Autotune Starts the auto tuning procedure for the speed regulator Setting this parameter to 1 On and pressing Enter on the HIM keypad initiates the speed regulator auto tuning procedure When the auto tuning procedure is complete this parameter automatically resets to 0 Off Speed Tune Dir Choice of the rotation direction of the motor shaft rotation as seen from the motor shaft side for the speed regulator auto tuning procedure e Forward Clockwise rotation e Reverse Counter clockwise rotation Spd Tune Inertia Motor inertia value identified during the speed regulator auto tuning procedure SpdTune Friction Motor friction value identified during the speed regulator auto tuning procedure Speed Tune Kp Proportional gain value of the speed regulator identified during the speed regulator auto tuning procedure Speed Tune Ki Integral gain value of the speed regulator identified during the speed regulator auto tuning procedure Autotune Cur Lim Value of the torque current limit applied during the speed regulator auto tuning procedure Values Default Options Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters Ready Ready Start Forward Fo
180. mit Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Provides an internal fixed speed command value In bipolar mode direction is commanded by the sign of the reference Note Preset Speed 1 cannot be directly selected by the Speed Sel digital inputs However Par 154 Preset Speed 1 can be directed to Par 42 Trim Ramp via the Scale Block parameters Jog Speed Reference value for jog mode Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input TB Manual Ref Reference value for the drive when the Terminal Block asserts Manual reference control Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters 0 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 1750 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 1750 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 1750 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 0 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 0 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 150 300 600 900 1200 1500 1750 32768 32767 RPM 100 32767 RPM 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM
181. n the value of this parameter is acquired automatically based on the value of Par 779 PI Central v sel x 1000 PI Central v1 The first value that can be selected via Par 779 PI Central v sel as the initial output of the PID regulator s integral component corresponding to initial diameter 1 The value entered in this parameter must be less than the value set in Par 784 PI Upper Limit and greater than the value set in Par 785 PI Lower Limit PI Central v2 The second value that can be selected via Par 779 PI Central v sel as the initial output of the PID regulator s integral component corre sponding to initial diameter 2 The value entered in this parameter must be less than the value set in Par 784 PI Upper Limit and great er than the value set in Par 785 PI Lower Limit PI Central v3 The third value that can be selected via Par 779 Pl Central v sel as the initial output of the PID regulator s integral component corresponding to initial diameter 3 The value entered in this parameter must be less than the value set in Par 784 PI Upper Limit and greater than the value set in Par 785 PI Lower Limit Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Programming and Parameters 0 0 10000 10 00 0 0
182. n Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters 1 00 0 00 32 00 m 1 00 0 00 32 00 m 0 3 Enabled Disabled Enabled 100 0 5000 ms 0 0 60000 ms 0 00 0 00 199 99 1 00 100 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 0 00 199 99 0 00 0 00 199 99 3 41 Related 799 1153 799 1153 1164 1165 1166 1167 1155 1206 3 42 File APPLICATIONS Group Winder Functions Programming and Parameters 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1193 1194 1195 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Taper Enable Enables Disables the Taper function Initial Diameter Diameter that starts the taper tension reduction Final Diameter Diameter that ends the taper tension reduction Tension Reduct Taper tension reduction as a percentage of Par 1180 Tension Ref Tension Ref Tension reference Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Tension Scale Scale factor of the torque current This parameter is used when the value of the maximum winding torque must be limited or when a closed loop control is used in order to adjust the torque current value to the real tension on the material measured by the load cell Time AccDec Min
183. n Mode Reference Config 3 45 1222 Scale3 In Max Scale Blocks 3 38 1323 DPI P1 Select DPI Inputs 3 70 1223 Scale3 In Min Scale Blocks 3 3 1324 DPI P2 Select DPI Inputs 70 1224 Scale3 In Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1325 DPI P3 Select DPI Inputs 3 70 1225 Scale3 Out Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1326 DPI P4 Select DPI Inputs 3 70 1226 Scale3 In Abs Scale Blocks 39 1327 DPI P5 Select DPI Inputs 70 1227 Scale4 Input Scale Blocks 3 38 1328 Drive Logic Rslt Diagnostics 3 50 1228 Scale4 Output Scale Blocks 3 38 1343 DPI Port Value Comm Control 3 57 1229 Scale4 Mul Scale Blocks 3 38 1344 Start At Powerup Restart Modes 3 31 1230 Scale4 Div Scale Blocks 3 38 1345 Powerup Delay Restart Modes 3 31 1231 Scale4 In Max Scale Blocks 3 38 1347 Fault Clear Faults 3 51 1232 Scale4 In Min Scale Blocks 3 1348 Fault Clr Mode Faults 3 51 1233 Scale4 In Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1349 Status1 at Fault Faults 3 51 1234 Scale4 Out Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1350 Status2 at Fault Faults 3 51 1235 Scale4 In Abs Scale Blocks 39 1351 Fault 1 Code Faults 52 1236 Scale5 Output Scale Blocks 3 38 1352 Fault 2 Code Faults 3 52 1237 Scaled Input Scale Blocks 3 38 1353 Fault 3 Code Faults 3 52 1238 Scale5 Mul Scale Blocks 3 38 1354 Fault 4 Code Faults 3 52 1239 Scaled Div Scale Blocks 3 38 1355 Fault 5 Code Faults 3 52 1240 Scale5 In Max Scale Blocks 3 38 1356 Fault 6 Code Faults 3 52 1241 Scaled In Min Scale Blocks 3 38 1357 Fault 7 C
184. n Out 2 1268 Digital Outputs 3 6 PD Output PID 421 PD Control 35 Inversion Out 3 1269 Digital Outputs 3 69 PD Prop Gain 1 768 PD Control 3 35 Inversion Out 4 1270 Digital Outputs 3 69 PD Prop Gain 2 788 PD Control 3 35 Inversion Out 5 1271 Digital Outputs 3 6 PD Prop Gain 3 790 PD Control 3 35 Inversion Out 6 1272 Digital Outputs 3 69 PI Central v sel 779 PI Control 3 34 Inversion Out 7 1273 Digital Outputs 3 69 PI Central v1 776 PI Control 3 33 Inversion Out 8 1274 Digital Outputs 3 6 PI Central v2 777 PI Control 3 33 Inversion Relay1 1393 Digital Outputs 3 69 PI Central v3 778 PI Control 3 33 Inversion Relay2 1275 Digital Outputs 3 69 PI Central vs0 780 PI Control 3 34 Jog Mask 593 Masks amp Owners 57 PI Central vs1 781 PI Contro 34 Jog Owner 602 Masks amp Owners 3 58 PI Init Intgl Gn 734 PID Control 3 35 Jog Speed 266 Discrete Speeds 3 23 PI Init Prop Gn 793 Pl Control 3 34 Jog TW Enable 1256 Winder Functions 3 44 Pl integr freeze 783 PI Control 3 34 Jog TW Speed 1255 Winder Functions 3 44 PI Integral Gain 764 PI Control 3 33 Last Stop Source 1402 Diagnostics 3 51 PI Lower Limit 785 PI Control 3 34 Line Accel Pct 1184 Winder Functions 3 42 PI Output 771 PI Control 3 33 Line Decel Pct 1185 Winder Functions 3 42 PI Prop Gain PID 765 PI Control 3 33 Line FastStp Pct 1186 Winder Functions 3 42 PI Steady Thr 695 PI Control 3 33 Line Spd Gain 1156 Diameter Calc 3 40 PI Upper Limit 784 Pl Control 3 34 Line
185. nal 115V AC to 24V DC I O Converter Circuit Board What This Option Board Provides 0 0 c cece ccc eee eens VO Converter Board Wiring 0 0 cece ene eee eens Who Should Use this Manual What is in this Manual Drive Storage Conditions Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install start up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex DC drive For information on See page Who Should Use this Manual Preface 1 What is in this Manual Preface 1 Drive Storage Conditions Preface 1 Drive Nameplate Data Preface 2 Reference Materials Preface 2 Drive Frame Sizes Preface 2 Manual Conventions Preface 3 General Precautions Preface 3 Catalog Number Explanation Preface 4 This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate DC drives In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions detailed in this manual The PowerFlex DC User Manual is designed to provide installation basic start up information and drive parameter definitions For detailed drive information please refer to Reference Materials on page Preface 2 for a list of additional publications If it is necessary to store the drive for any length of time before installation follow these storage guidelines in order to ensure satisfactory operation at start up and to maintain warranty coverage
186. ng 1 35 Required Parameter Changes e Set Digital Input 1 Reversing 2 Run Fwd 133 Digital In1 Sel 24V DC external supply 7 6 Run Forward Run Rev 14 e Set Digital Input 2 lis 134 Digital In2 Sel 16 7 Run Reverse 24V Neutral Er Corman JJ 18 19 TT 20 3 Wire Control e No Changes Required 24V DC internal supply Siop 1 2 A 3 Start 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 3 Wire Control e No Changes Required 24V DC external supply Stop 1 Requires 3 wire functions only 12 Digital In1 Sel Using 2 wire L 3 selections will cause a type 2 start U 14 alarm page page 4 7 5 16 NO 17 me 18 24V Neutral 9 Common gt Be Sa 1 Refer to the Attention statement on page 1 27 for important bipolar wiring information e Important Programming inputs for 2 wire control deactivates the HIM Start and Jog buttons 8 0 20mA or 4 20mA operation requires that the switch at S9 S10 or S11 be set to the ON position or drive damage may occur Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 1 36 Installation and Wiring Digital Encoder Terminal Block The encoder connection cables should always be connected directly to the terminals on the encoder terminal block The encoder cable must be mad
187. ng Par 233 Output Voltage assert a Jog command via the HIM keypad or digital input on the I O terminal block and observe the motor rotation direction Verify whether or not Par 233 Output Voltage is positive 6 If the observed rotation direction is incorrect remove power from the drive and continue with step 6 below while referring to the motor connection diagrams in Figure 2 2 below If the observed rotation direction is correct continue with step 10 below Make certain power is turned off and locked out 8 Switch the armature leads connected to C and D Figure 2 2 Motor Connections ct OF OF 6 C1 OFF OF C O OA 2 C ai 2 2 DO O Oa2 DE A2 D1 O OF2 D1 O OF2 PowerFlex DC Motor PowerFlex DC Motor Straight Shunt Machine Straight Shunt Machine CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End CW Rotation Facing Commutator End 9 Apply power to the drive 10 Repeat steps 4 and 5 above and verify that the motor rotation is correct Drive Start Up 2 11 11 Complete the appropriate procedure based on the type of feedback device used for the application 4 4 For Armature Voltage feedback Continue with Step 10 Configure the Speed Feedback Parameters on page 2 12 For Analog Tachometer feedback Assert a Jog command and verify that the sign and value of Par 1408 Tachometer Speed corresponds with the ac
188. ng and Parameters Notes
189. ng the launching Min Max 0 30 300 00 phase a stop command is issued Units 3 1198 Offs Accel Time Default 83 88 Ramp time for the initial phase when the machine is stopped It refers Min Max 0 30 300 00 to Par 45 Max Ref Speed Units s 1199 W Offset Default 0 Speed reference offset for the initial phase of the winder unwinder Min Max 0 1000 when the line is stopped Units RPM 1200 Spd Match Gain Default 100 Speed reference gain during the launching phase 100 corresponds Min Max 0 150 to a peripheral speed equal to the line speed Units 1201 Winder Side Default 0 Selection of the winding unwinding side Min Max 0 1 e 0 Up e 1 Down Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input 1202 W Gain Default 0 Sets the speed reference gain used to saturate the speed loop This Min Max 0 100 parameter is a percentage of the increasing decreasing value of the Units angular speed reference 1203 Spd Match Compl Default Read Only Indicates a completed launching ramp If this parameter is assigned Min Max 0 32767 to a programmed digital output it can be used to indicate that the coil can be changed e Launching ramp completed e 0 Launching ramp not completed 1204 Line Spd Source Default 0 Number of the sampling parameter for the line speed Min Max 0 65535 1208 Close Loop Comp Default Read Only Active compensation status output of the PID regu
190. ng the user defined drive Min Max 1 32767 speed display units Note This parameter is not used 3 53 Related 1322 3 54 Programming and Parameters Related S Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values UserDefined0 Default 0 504 UserDefinedi A 505 UserDefined2 Min Max 32768 32767 506 UserDefined3 507 UserDefined4 508 UserDefined5 509 UserDefined6 510 UserDefined7 511 UserDefined8 512 UserDefined9 513 UserDefined10 514 UserDefined11 515 UserDefined12 516 UserDefined13 517 UserDefined14 518 UserDefined15 General use signed 16 bit variables used for data exchange Note Pars 503 506 can be assigned to analog inputs The values of Pars 503 504 and 507 509 can be assigned to an analog output UsrDefBitWrdA Default 0 520 A bitmap of Pars 520 UsrDefBitWrdA0 through 535 Min Max 0 65535 999 UsrDefBitWrdA15 With a parameter it is possible to read or write all of the bits inside a word Example UsrDefBitWrdA0 UsrDefBitWrdA1 UsrDefBitWrdA2 UsrDefBitWrdA3 UsrDefBitWrdA4 UsrDefBitWrdA5 UsrDefBitWrdA6 UsrDefBitWrdA7 UsrDefBitWrdA8 UsrDefBitWrdA9 UsrDefBitWrdA10 UsrDefBitWrdA1 1 UsrDefBitWrdA12 UsrDefBitWrdA13 UsrDefBitWrdA14 UsrDefBitWrdA15 UsrDefBitWrdA 2 32 64 1024 4096 5218 Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input or output The bit numb
191. ngs be completed as described above Table 1 H DIP Switch S14 Field Current Configuration Settings ON DIP Note Illustration is an example Tl B A E I T configuration only DIP switch 14 must be set gt the rated field current specified on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 the motor nameplate or possible motor damage may result Equivalent Switch ohms 148 330 182 36 4 845 1650 Resistance Field current scale S14 1 S14 2 14 3 S14 4 514 5 S14 6 S14 7 14 8 1 0A OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF JON 1650 ohm 2 0A OFF OFF OFF OFF JON OFF 845 ohm 3 0A OFF OFF OFF jOFF ON ON 558 8 ohm 5 0A OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 330 ohm 10 0 A ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Not used 168 ohm 12 9A ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 129 2 ohm 17 2 A OFF ON ON OFF JON ON 97 ohm 20 0 A ON OFF ON OFF OFF JON 83 ohm 24 1 A ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 69 ohm Relay Outputs Terminals 35 and 36 and 75 and 76 are N O relay outputs The relay output between terminals 35 and 36 is configured with parameter 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel The relay output between terminals 75 and 76 is configured with parameter 629 Relay Out 2 Sel See Using Contactors on page 1 9 for more information Thermistors and Thermal Switches To detect motor overheating and protect the motor from overloading an external user supplied thermistor PTC or thermal switch must be connected to terminals 78 an
192. o Pl Central vs0 and PI Central vs1 through binary selection determine which of the four possible output values is used as the initial level of the integral component corresponding to the initial diameter of the PI block Refer to Par 780 PI Central vs0 for binary selection values Diam Calc When asserted initiates the diameter calculation Par 794 Diameter Calc Diam Reset Sets the diameter starting value to the value in Par 1168 Diam Preset Sel DiamCalc Dis Enables disables the diameter calculation Par 1161 Diameter Calc Dis Torq Wind En Enables disables the Center wind function Par 1209 Torque Winder En Speed Match When asserted issues the coil launch phase command for automatic switching Par 1195 Speed Match Diam I D En Enables disables the ability of the diameter calculation to increase for an unwider or decrease for a winder Par 1205 Diam Inc Dec En Wind Unwind Sets the value of Par 1187 Winder Type to 0 Winder or 1 Unwinder Diam Preset0 Selects the value of Par 1164 Diam Preset 0 1165 Diam Preset 1 Par 1166 Diam Preset 2 or Par 1167 Diam Preset 3 See Par 1168 Diam Preset Sel Taper Enable Enables disables the Taper function Par 1176 Taper Enable Spd DemandEn Enables disables the speed reference calculation winder operation Par 1215 Speed Demand En Winder Side Selection of the winding unwinding side 0 up 1 down PI PD En
193. ock for correction of the PI block PI Init Prop Gn The initial value of the proportional gain This parameter is active when e its value has exceeded the value of Par 695 PI Steady Thrsh e the amount of time defined in Par 731 PID Steady Delay has elapsed and feed forward is less than the value defined in Par 695 PI Steady Thrsh or e Par 769 Enable PI transitions from 0 low to 1 high and the amount of time defined in Par 731 PID Steady Delay has elapsed Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max 0 3 0 1 Par 785 Pl Lower Limit 10 00 0 00 10 00 Par 784 PI Upper Limit 10 00 0 00 100 00 Related 769 776 777 778 780 781 695 731 769 File APPLICATIONS Group PD Control PID Control No 421 766 767 768 788 789 790 791 418 731 734 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PD Output PID Proportional Derivative PD block output PD Deriv Gain 1 First derivative gain of the PD block The value specified in this field depends on the enabling and configuration of Par 181 Adaptive Spd En PD Deriv Filter Time constant of the filter from the derivative portion of the PD block PD Prop Gain 1 First proportional gain of the block
194. ode Faults 3 52 1242 Scaled In Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1358 Fault 8 Code Faults 3 52 1243 Scale5 Out Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1359 Fault 9 Code Faults 3 52 1244 Scale5 In Abs Scale Blocks 3 39 1360 Fault 10 Code Faults 3 52 1245 Scale6 Output Scale Blocks 3 38 1361 Fault 1 Time Faults 3 52 1246 Scale6 Input Scale Blocks 3 38 1362 Fault 2 Time Faults 3 52 1247 Scale6 Mul Scale Blocks 3 38 1363 Fault 3 Time Faults 3 52 1248 Scale6 Div Scale Blocks 3 38 1364 Fault 4 Time Faults 3 52 1249 Scale6 In Max Scale Blocks 3 38 1365 Fault 5 Time Faults 3 52 1250 Scale6 In Min Scale Blocks 3 38 1366 Fault 6 Time Faults 3 52 1251 Scale6 In Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1367 Fault 7 Time Faults 3 52 1252 Scale6 Out Off Scale Blocks 3 39 1368 Fault 8 Time Faults 3 52 1253 Scale6 In Abs Scale Blocks 3 39 1369 Fault 9 Time Faults 3 52 1254 PID Error Gain PID Control 3 38 1370 Fault 10 Time Faults 3 52 1255 Jog TW Speed Winder Functions 3 44 1371 Fault Arm Amps Faults 3 52 1256 Jog TW Enable Winder Functions 3 44 1372 Fault Speed Diagnostics 3 52 1258 Enable PID PID Control 3 38 1373 Fault Field Amps Diagnostics 3 52 1262 Closing Speed Stop Modes 3 31 1374 Fault Voltage Diagnostics 3 52 1263 Opening Delay Stop Modes 3 31 1375 MOP Select Reference Config 3 45 1265 Ramp In Zero En Stop Modes 3 31 1376 Logic Mask Act Security 3 59 1266 Actuator Delay Stop Modes 3 31 1377 Write Mask Act Security 3 60 1267 Inver
195. omp Winder Functions 3 41 789 PD Deriv Gain 2 PD Control 3 35 1172 Constant J Comp Winder Functions 3 41 790 PD Prop Gain 3 PD Control 3 35 1173 Mater Width Pct Winder Functions 3 41 791 PD Deriv Gain 3 PD Control 3 35 1174 Static Friction Winder Functions 3 41 792 Ang In 1 Filter Analog Inputs 3 62 1175 Dynamic Friction Winder Functions 3 41 793 PI Init Prop Gn PI Control 3 34 1176 Taper Enable Winder Functions 3 42 794 Diameter Calc Diameter Calc 3 39 1177 Initial Diameter Winder Functions 3 42 795 DnerPosSpd Diameter Calc 3 39 1178 Final Diameter Winder Functions 3 42 796 Max Deviation Diameter Calc 3 39 1179 Tension Reduct Winder Functions 3 42 797 Gear Box Ratio Diameter Calc 3 39 1180 Tension Ref Winder Functions 3 42 798 Dancer Constan Diameter Calc 3 39 1181 Tension Scale Winder Functions 3 42 799 Minimum Diameter Diameter Calc 3 39 1182 Time AccDec Min Winder Functions 3 42 800 Diameter Calc S Diameter Calc 3 39 1183 Int Acc Calc En Winder Functions 3 42 911 Z Channel Enable Speed Feedback 3 20 1184 Line Accel Pct Winder Functions 3 42 912 Z Capture Pos En Speed Feedback 3 20 1185 Line Decel Pct Winder Functions 3 42 913 Z Captured Pos Speed Feedback 3 20 1186 Line FastStp Pct Winder Functions 3 42 916 Fld Const 40 Pci Field Config 3 16 1187 Winder Type Winder Functions 3 42 917 Fld Const 70 Pci Field Config 3 16 1188 Accel Status Diagnostics 3 49 918 Fld Const 90 Pci Field Config 3 16 1189 Decel Status Diagnos
196. ons and weights specified above must be taken into consideration when mounting the device Use the proper equipment to safely lift and hold the weight of the drive while mounting ATTENTION To guard against possible personal injury or AN equipment damage e Inspect all lifting hardware for proper attachment before lifting the drive e Do Not allow any part of the drive or lifting mechanism to make contact with electrically charged conductors or components e Do Not subject the drive to high rates of acceleration or deceleration while transporting to the mounting location or when lifting e Do Not allow personnel or their limbs directly underneath the drive when it is being lifted and mounted 1 6 Installation and Wiring Mounting Frame C Drives All lifting equipment and lifting components hooks bolts lifts slings chains etc must have a minimum lifting capacity of 453 6 kg 1 000 Ib Important Verify that all mounting screws are properly tightened before and after drive operation 1 Verify the hole pattern on the panel to which the drive will be mounted Refer to Figure 1 4 on page 1 5 2 Insert but do not tighten one bolt in one of the top holes in the panel The bolt must be fully threaded into the panel before hanging the drive 3 Insert the properly sized and rated lifting hooks into the holes on the lifting flanges at the top of the drive To limit the pull in forces on the drive the lifting de
197. ontrol register of the zero pulse and of the encoder Min Max 0 6553 qualification signal 913 Z Captured Pos Default Read Only Data and function status register Min Max 0 21 923 Act Spd Filter Default 0 100 121 First order low pass filter time constant for Par 121 Spd Min Max 0 001 1 000 Feedback Pct Units s 1021 Encoder Out Sel Default 0 off Defines the speed reference to which the encoder signal can be Options 0 off input This parameter is typically set to 0 Off and the encoder 1 Trim Ramp is used for speed feedback only When set to other than 0 Off 2 Trim Speed the choice of the speed reference destination must be made 3 Speed Ref A according to the configuration of the speed regulator for 4 Speed Ref B example Speed Ref A cannot be used with an active ramp 452 CurrReg Autotune Default 0 Off Setting this parameter to 1 On and pressing Enter on the HIM Options 0 off keypad initiates the current regulator auto tuning procedure 1 Or When the auto tuning procedure is complete this parameter automatically resets to 0 Off The resulting armature resistance and inductance values are set in parameters 453 Arm Resistance and 454 Arm Inductance respectively 453 Arm Resistance Default 0 50 452 Motor armature resistance This parameter can be manually Min Max Based on drive current rating changed to a value other than the value obt
198. or 3 27 193 Adaptive Gain3 Adaptv Regulator 3 32 446 Speed Up Base Speed Regulator 3 27 199 Arm Current Pct Current Meters 3 12 447 Speed Up Filter Speed Regulator 3 27 200 Arm Current Current Meters 12 452 CurrReg Autotune Autotune 3 20 201 Drive Type Sel Motor Data 3 14 453 Arm Resistance Autotune 3 20 203 OverVolt Fit Cfg Alarms 3 52 454 Arm Inductance Autotune 3 20 209 Save HIM Ref HIM Ref Config 3 45 455 Spd Fdbk Error Speed Feedback 19 210 Man Ref Preload HIM Ref Config 3 45 456 Fld Weaken Ratio Field Config 3 15 211 Param Access Lvl Drive Memory 3 45 457 Spd Fdbk Control Speed Feedback 3 19 233 Output Voltage Drive Data 3 13 458 SpdReg FB Bypass Speed Feedback 3 1 234 Fid Current Pct Torque Attribute 3 12 459 SpdReg Kp Bypass Speed Regulator 3 27 235 Elapsed Lifetime Drive Data 3 13 460 SpdReg Ki Bypass Speed Regulator 3 27 236 Spd Reg Out Pct Speed Regulator 3 11 465 Drive Size Drive Data 3 1 242 Speed Reg En Speed Regulator 3 26 466 AC Line Voltage Drive Data 3 13 245 Speed Ramp En Ramp Rates 3 29 467 Max Fid Curr Pct Field Config 3 15 249 Save MOP Ref Reference Config 3 45 468 Min Fld Curr Pet Field Config 3 15 258 Reset Defaults Drive Memory 3 45 469 Field Mode Sel Field Config 3 15 259 Anlg Int Tune Analog Inputs 3 62 473 FldLoss Fit Cfg Alarms 3 52 260 Anlg In2 Tune Analog Inputs 3 62 478 Spd Loss Fit Cfg Alarms 3 53 261 Anlg In3 Tune Analog Inputs 3 62 481 UnderVolt Thresh Alarms 3 53 263
199. otation for four quadrant drives The value of this parameter is input to the speed regulator and therefore takes into account the reference value that comes from the ramp as well as the direction of rotation If the value of Maximum Speed is changed Pars 3 Max Speed Fwd and 4 Max Speed Rev are set to the same value If either Par 3 Max Speed Fwd or Par 4 Max Speed Rev is changed later the last change is valid Max Speed Fwd Defines the maximum speed for forward clockwise rotation of the motor The value of Max Speed Fwd affects the input of the speed regulator and therefore takes into account both the reference values that come from the ramp as well as the direction of motor rotation Max Speed Rev Defines the maximum speed for reverse counterclockwise rotation of the motor for four quadrant drives only The value of Max Speed Rev affects the input of the speed regulator and therefore takes into account both the reference values that come from the ramp as well as the direction of rotation Min Speed Fwd Defines the minimum speed for forward clockwise rotation of the motor Speed reference values below the value in this parameter are clamped until the reference exceeds this limit Min Speed Rev Defines the minimum speed for reverse counterclockwise rotation of the motor for four quadrant drives only Speed reference values below the value in this parameter are clamped until the reference exceeds this li
200. ow and must not be mounted at an angle greater than 30 from vertical In addition inlet air temperature must not exceed the product specification Figure 1 1 Drive Enclosure Minimum Mounting Clearances gt 150 mm 6 0 in Heer gt 150 mm 6 0 in U Co Y lt a a 2 a Ca N 2 50 mm Airflow through iii n the drive must not be impeded Mounting Dimensions and The PowerFlex DC drive is available in a NEMA UL Type Open IP20 Weights enclosure Following all mounting instructions in order to ensure proper operation the container s of desiccants if any from the drive enclosure ATTENTION Remove all loose packing materials including before mounting and energizing the drive Installation and Wiring Figure 1 2 Frame A Approximate Dimensions A B C A1 B1 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 267 10 5 359 14 0 287 11 3 250 9 8 275 10 8 Table 1 4 Frame A Weights Weight Drive Current Rating Code Drive Drive amp Packaging 230V 460V kg Ibs kg Ibs 7P0 4P1 8 4 19 5 10 5 23 1 9P0 6P0 012 010 020
201. owing medium e Re connection to a spinning motor after a fault or alarm Note If the Flying Start function is disabled ensure that the motor is not spinning when the drive is turned on or harsh motor deceleration in current limit may occur Spd Fdbk Filter Time constant used by the filter for the Speed Feedback circuit Filtering of the high frequency components of the speed feedback signal is useful in the case of elastic coupling between the motor and load i e joints or belts Values Default Options Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Min Max Units 0 Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable 10 00 0 00 100 00 Enabled 0 Disabled Enabled 1 Notactive 0 Active 1 Not active 0 Disabled 0 Disabled Enabled 0 0 1000 ms a Related 39 41 236 121 122 File SPEED COMMAND gt gt co co D al Group Speed Regulator No 445 446 447 459 460 493 494 1016 1191 1192 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Spd Up Gain Pct The Speed Up function gain as a percentage of Par 446 Speed Up Base Speed Up Base The Speed Up function maximum gain This value corresponds to 100 of Par
202. p 1 S Shaped e 1 S Shaped S shaped ramp 19 S Curve Time Default 1 00 18 S shaped curve time constant The value of Par 19 S Curve Time is Min Max 0 10 60 00 ain added to the ramp time of linear ramps regardless of speed changes Units Ss 667 If the value of S Curve Time is changed Pars 665 and 667 S Curve 668 Accel x and 666 and 668 S Curve Decel x are set to the same value If any of parameters 665 668 are changed later the last change is valid S Curve Time 20 Ramp Delay Default 100 113 Defines a ramp delay time when the ramp is active Works with par Min Max 0 65535 ae Digital Outx Sel set to 6 Ramp Pos or 7 Ramp Neg Units ms Par 113 Ramp Out Par 346 Torque Positive Par 347 Torque Negative Par 20 Ramp Delay 22 MOP Accel Time Default 10 2 The acceleration rate for the MOP reference in response to a digital Min Max 0 65535 input The MOP acceleration rate Par 2 Maximum Speed Par 22 Units s MOP Accel Time If 0 is entered in this parameter the ramp output directly follows the reference value 24 Accel Time 2 Default 10 2 Sets the rate of acceleration for Ramp 2 Min Max 0 65535 Acceleration rate for Ramp 2 Par 2 Maximum Speed Par 24 Units s Accel Time 2 30 MOP Decel Time Default 10 2 The deceleration rate for the MOP reference in response to a digital Min Max 0 65535 input The MOP deceleration rate Par 2 Maximum Speed P
203. peed regulator keeps its proportional gain component when the drive is stopped Spd Zero P Gain The proportional gain of the speed regulator that is only active when the value of the speed reference and actual speed 0 This parameter is only active when Par 125 Spd Zero P En 1 Enabled Used in the Zero Speed function Speed Reg En Enables Disables the speed regulator output to the torque current regulator e Enabled The speed regulator output is connected to the input of the torque current regulator e Disabled The speed regulator output is not connected to the input of the torque current regulator Par 39 Torque Ref is connected to the input of the current regulator Lock Speed Integ Enables or disables the integral I function of the speed regulator e Not active The integral component of the speed regulator is enabled e Active The integral component of the speed regulator is disabled Flying Start En Enables Disables the ability of the drive to connect to a spinning motor at actual RPM when a start command is issued e Enabled When the drive is turned on the speed of the motor is measured and the ramp output is set accordingly The drive then runs at the set reference value e Disabled When the drive is turned on the ramp starts from zero Main uses e To connect to a motor that is already spinning due to its load e g in the case of pumps the fl
204. ping parameters that are used for similar functions The parameters are organized into files Each file is divided into groups and each parameter is an element in a group By default the LCD HIM displays parameters by File Group Parameter view Numbered List View All parameters are in numerical order Cross Reference Tables Refer to Parameter Cross Reference by Name on page 3 71 and Parameter Cross Reference by Number on page 3 76 for a list of parameters and page numbers 3 4 Programming and Parameters Basic Parameter View Parameter 211 Param Access Lvl set to option 0 Basic File Group Parameters Monitor Speed Meters Speed Ref A 44 Ramp In Pct 111 Spd Feedback 122 Speed Ref A Pct 47 Ramp Out 113 Spd Feedback Pct 121 Speed Ref B 48 Ramp Out Pct 114 Actual Speed 924 Speed Ref B Pct 49 Speed Draw Out 1018 Encoder Speed 420 Speed Ref Out 385 Spd Draw Out Pct 1019 Tachometer Speed 1408 Spd Ref Out Pct 384 Speed Reg In 118 Ramp In 110 Speed Reg In Pct 117 Current Meters Spd Reg Out Pct 236 Field Current 351 Filt TorqCur Pct 928 Current Reg In 41 Fld Current Pct 234 Field Ref Pct 500 Arm Current 200 Cur Lim Pos Out 10 Arm Current Pct 199 Cur Lim Neg Out 114 Drive Data FaultCode 57 Output Voltage 233 Drive Size 465 AC Line Voltage 466 Output Power 1052 Elapsed Lifetime 235
205. pr_Lim4 755 forque Attribute 3 18 W Target 1210 Winder Functions 3 43 tqTpr_Spd 756 forque Attribute 3 18 Winder Side 1201 Winder Functions 3 43 stGen Amplitude 60 Test Generator 3 22 Winder Type 1187 Winder Functions 3 42 stGen Frequency 59 est Generator 3 22 Write Mask Act 1377 Security 3 60 stGen Offset 61 est Generator 3 22 Write Mask Cfg 1378 Security 3 60 stGen Output 58 est Generator 3 22 Z Channel Enable 911 Speed Feedback 3 20 UnderVolt Thresh 481 Alarms 3 53 Z Captured Pos 913 Speed Feedback 3 20 UserDefinedO 503 User Defined 3 54 Z Capture Pos En 912 Speed Feedback 3 20 UserDefined1 504 User Defined 3 54 Zero Ramp Input 345 Ramp Rates 3 29 3 76 Programming and Parameters Parameter Cross Reference by Number Name No Group Page Zero Ramp Output 344 Ramp Rates 3 29 Zero Torque 353 Torque Attribute 3 17 No Parameter Name Group Page No Parameter Name Group Page 81 Anlg In3 Config Analog Inputs 3 61 1 Minimum Speed Limits 3 23 82 Anlg In3 Scale Analog Inputs 3 61 2 Maximum Speed Limits 3 23 83 Anlg3 Tune Scale Analog Inputs 3 61 3 Max Speed Fwd Limits 2 84 Anlg In3 Offset Analog Inputs 3 62 4 Max Speed Rev Limits 3 23
206. ptive Ref Par 183 30 UsrDefined11 Par 514 46 W Reference Par 1217 15 Arm Cur Pct Par 199 31 UsrDefined12 Par 515 787 PID Source Gain Default 1 00 786 Gain of the input value to Par 786 PID Source Min Max 100 00 1046 PID Accel Time Default 0 00 Ramp acceleration time after the block PID offset Min Max 0 00 900 00 Units s 1047 PID Decel Time Default 0 00 Ramp deceleration time after the block PID offset Min Max 0 00 900 00 Units s 3 38 File 72 p e E lt x Q a a lt Group PID Control Scale Blocks Programming and Parameters mol Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 1254 PID Error Gain Default 1 005 759 Gain percentage of Par 759 PID Error Min Max 0 000 32 010 Units Enable PID Default 0 Disabled Enables Disables both the PI and PD portions of the PID regulator Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled pea Input Default 0 Scale2 Input Scale3 Input Min Max 0 1408 o Scale4 Input Scaled Input Scale6 Input Parameter number from which the value is read and used as the input quantity to the Scale block Refer to the Scale Blocks block diagram on page D 18 for more information 485 Scale1 Output Default 0 554 Scale2 Output i 1219 Scale3 Output Min Max 0 1408 o 1228 Scale4 Output 1237
207. r connected to the drive terminals 78 and 79 Bit 9 Aux Input An auxiliary input interlock is open or a voltage 15 30 V or reference signal is missing for the digital input set to 14 Aux Fault Bit 10 Field Loss The field current is too low Bit 11 Encoder Loss The drive is not receiving a speed feedback signal Bit 12 PwrUp Start Indicates that the drive is starting or has automatically resumed running at commanded speed after drive input power is restored Note Refer to Chapter 4 Troubleshooting on page 4 1 for information 5 2 QT 5 o 2 ile le la zg r r s EF EL lS Elgg ss ele je o s os l2 e 8 8 3 B Is 0 0 9 SiS ie 2 lu SL L LEE la DD Cc lo iw it jt O O lw O lt m A O na Default x x x x x 1010 10 0 0 0 0 10 0 10 0 Bit 15 114 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UsrDsplyMult0 Default 1 Numerator in the calculation for user defined drive speed display Min Max 1 1073741823 units Note This parameter is not used UsrDsplyDiv0 Default 1 Denominator in the calculation for user defined drive speed display Min Max 1 1073741823 units Note This parameter is not used UsrValMult1 Default 1 Numerator in the calculation for scaling the user defined drive speed Min Max 1 32767 display units Note This parameter is not used UsrValDiv1 Default 1 Denominator in the calculation for scali
208. r current damage exists when using bipolar input sources Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment 1 28 Installation and Wiring DIP Switch and Jumper Settings DIP switches and jumpers on the regulator circuit board are used to configure the drive for flashing firmware to the control board the appropriate speed feedback device settings analog input signals and minimum field current Most switches and jumpers are set to the appropriate configuration at the factory Figure 1 29 Control Circuit Board DIP Switch and Jumper Locations Refer to Table 1 M on page 1 29 for descriptions corresponding to the ID numbers shown below m al o l O O A JE ret ou o OWL O E O L E
209. regulator as a percentage of the value defined in Par 93 Spd Reg Kp Base Spd Reg Ki Outpt Displays the active integral coefficient of the speed regulator as a percentage of the value defined in Par 94 Spd Reg Ki Base Speed Thresh Pos Threshold speed for the drive above or below which the value of Par 393 Speed Threshold changes When the speed of the drive exceeds the value of this parameter Par 393 Speed Threshold displays Above Thresh 0 When the speed of the drive is below the value of this parameter Par 393 Speed Threshold displays Below Thresh 1 Speed Thresh Neg Threshold speed for the drive above or below which the value of Par 393 Speed Threshold changes When the speed of the drive exceeds the value specified in this parameter Par 393 Speed Threshold displays Above Thresh 0 When the speed of the drive is below this threshold Par 393 Speed Threshold displays Below Thresh 1 Values Default Min Max Units 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 1 The value of Par 45 Max Ref Speed cannot exceed 8192 RPM Default Min Max Units 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 1 The value of Par 45 Max Ref Speed cannot exceed 8192 RPM Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max
210. rence 2 5k ohm load Max 10V 10mA 8 10V Pot Reference 9 Pot Common For and 10V pot references 10 PE ground PE ground to drive chassis 1 Differential Isolation External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE Input provides high common mode immunity Table 1 S 1 0 Terminal Block 2 Designations No Signal Description Factory Default Config Parameter 11 Internal OV Gnd 12 Digital Input 1 Max 30V 15V 3 2mA 24V 5mA 2 Stop CF 133 Digital In1 Sel 13 Digital Input 2 and 30V 6 4mA 3 Start 134 Digital In2 Sel 14 Digital Input 3 11 Jog 135 Digital In3 Sel 15 Digital Input 4 1 Enable 136 Digital In4 Sel 16 Digital Input Common 17 Not Used 18 24V Supply Common Common for the internal power supply 19 24V DC Supply Drive supplied control input power s Max 20 30V 200mA 20 PE ground PE ground to drive chassis 1 A digital input 1 8 must be configured for Enable When using the internal 24V DC supply terminal 19 for digital inputs 1 4 you must connect the digital input common terminal 16 to the 24V supply common terminal 18 3 The total current draw is the sum of encoder power digital outputs and any other loads connected to terminal 19 Installation and Wiring 1 33 Table 1 T 1 0 Terminal Block 3 Designations Factory Default Config Par
211. rent Reg In is not set to zero e Active Par 41 Current Reg In is set zero The drive has no torque Related File No Not Active 13 Not Active Active 20 O non MOTOR CONTROL Not Active 41 Active Not Active O 3 18 Programming and Parameters S z 750 MOTOR CONTROL es 0J O Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions TrqTpr Enable Enables Disables the current speed function The current speed function allows you to change the current limits set in Pars 8 Current Lim Pos and 9 Current Lim Neg by setting up to five setpoints using parameters TrqTpr Limx and a threshold speed in Par 756 TrqTpr Sp e Disabled The limits current speed curve is disabled e Enabled The limits current speed curve is enabled Par 10 Cur Lim Pos Out or Par 11 Cur Lim Neg Out Current Speed rqTpr_Limoj tqTpr_Lim1 rqTpr_Lim2 rqTpr_Lim3j rqTpr_Lim4 Par 756 TrqTpr_Spd TrqTpr_Lim0 The current limit of the current speed curve that operates constantly up to the speed set in Par 756 TrqTpr Spd The value specified in this parameter overrides the values specified in Pars 8 Current Limit Pos and 9 Current Lim Neg TrqTpr_Lim1 First reduced current limit of the current speed curve The value defined in thi
212. roop function is disabled Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input Droop Limit The speed reference correction range within which the droop function becomes active Torq Limit Type This parameter determines the response of the drive during a current limiting condition e Torq Lim Pos Neg The active positive torque limit is set by the value defined in Par 7 Current Limit and the active negative torque limit defined in Par 9 Current Lim Neg e Torq Lim Mtr Gen With this selection three conditions are possible 1 If the motor speed gt 1 of Par 162 Max Feedback Spd the active positive torque limit is defined by Par 8 Current Lim Pos and the active negative torque limit is defined by Par 9 Current Lim Neg 2 If the motor speed lt 1 of Par 162 Max Feedback Spd the active positive torque limit is defied by Par 9 Current Lim Neg and the active negative torque limit is defined by Par 8 Current Lim Pos 3 If 1 of Par 162 Max Feedback Spd lt motor speed lt 1 of Par 162 Max Feedback Spd the active positive torque limit is define by Par 8 Current Lim Pos and the active negative torque limit is defined by Par 9 Current Lim Neg Fast Stop Time The amount of time to decelerate the drive to a complete stop and disable the drive The deceleration rate for Fast stop Maximum Speed Fast Stop Time This feature can be used when Digital Inx Sel is set to 30 Fas
213. rporated as a percentage of the value set in Par 179 Nom Units Mtr Arm Amps This parameter is only used when Par 242 Speed Reg En 0 Disabled Note The current reference value is proportional to the armature current of the motor and determines the torque The polarity determines the torque direction 40 Trim Torque Default 0 Second current reference value as a percentage of the value set Min Max 200 in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Trim Torque is added to Units Torque Reference and can be used as a correction value for the torque reference regardless of the value of Par 242 Speed Reg En 342 Torque Reduction Default Selection for torque reduction When the torque reduction Options function is active 1 Active the current limit changes accordingly by the percentage defined in Par 13 Torq Red CurLim When this parameter is set to 0 Not Active torque reduction is not active For example Par 7 Current Limit or Pars 8 Current Lim Pos and 9 Current Lim Neg 80 Par 13 Torq Red CurLim 70 If Par 342 Torque Reduction 0 Not Active the current limit 80 If Par 342 Torque Reduction 1 Active the current limit 70 Note This parameter can be assigned to a digital input 353 Zero Torque Default Sets the reference value for the armature current Par 41 Options Current Reg In to zero so that the drive has no torque e Not Active Par 41 Cur
214. rtia 1014 Autotune 3 20 MOP Inc Active 396 Diagnostics 3 48 nertia C Filter 1012 Autotune 3 2 MOP Mask 598 Masks 8 Owners 3 57 nertiaCompAct 1191 Speed Regulator 3 27 MOP Owner 607 Masks 8 Owners 3 58 nertiaCompVar 1192 Speed Regulator 3 27 MOP Select 1375 Reference Config 3 45 nitial Diameter 1177 Winder Functions 42 Nom Mtr Arm Amps 179 Motor Data 14 nt Acc Calc En 1183 Winder Functions 3 42 Nom Mtr Fld Amps 280 Motor Data 3 14 Inversion In 1 1276 Digital Inputs 3 66 Offs Accel Time 1198 Winder Functions 3 43 nversion In 10 1388 Digital Inputs 3 66 Opening Delay 1263 Stop Modes 31 nversion In 11 1389 Digital Inputs 3 66 Out Volt Level 921 Field Config 3 16 nversion In 12 1390 Digital Inputs 3 66 Output Power 1052 Drive Data 3 13 Inversion In 2 1277 Digital Inputs 3 6 Output Voltage 233 Drive Data 3 13 Inversion In 3 1278 Digital Inputs 3 66 OverCurrent Thr 584 Alarms 3 53 Inversion In 4 1279 Digital Inputs 3 66 OverTemp Fit Cfg 365 Alarms 3 52 Inversion In 5 1280 Digital Inputs 3 6 OverVolt Fit Cfg 203 Alarms 3 52 Inversion In 6 1281 Digital Inputs 3 66 Param Access Lvl 211 Drive Memory 3 45 Inversion In 7 1282 Digital Inputs 3 66 PD Deriv Filter 767 PD Control 3 35 Inversion In 8 1283 Digital Inputs 66 PD Deriv Gain 1 766 PD Control 3 35 Inversion In 9 1387 Digital Inputs 3 66 PD Deriv Gain 2 789 PD Control 3 35 Inversion Out 1 1267 Digital Outputs 3 69 PD Deriv Gain 3 791 PD Control 3 35 Inversio
215. rward Reverse Read Only 0 00 1000 00 Kg x m Read Only 0 00 99 99 N m Read Only 0 00 100 00 Read Only 0 00 100 00 20 0 Based on drive current rating 3 21 Related 3 22 MOTOR CONTROL Programming and Parameters o Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions TstGen Output Allows you to select a simulated parameter as the output for the test generator The test generator is used to manually tune the regulators It consists of a square wave generator whose frequency offset and amplitude can be manipulated e NotConnected No internal parameters defined by the generator Reserved Not used Torq Cur Ref The output of the generator defines the reference value of the torque current 100 corresponds to full load torque current FLT Field Ref The output of the generator defines the field reference value 100 corresponds to the rated field current based on the motor nameplate data parameters Ramp Ref The output of the generator defines the ramp reference value 100 corresponds to the value specified in Par 45 Max Ref Speed This is the value immediately before the Ramp function Speed Ref The output of the generator defines the speed reference value This is the value immediately before the Speed Regulator function P58 TstGen Output Generator Output P59 TstGen
216. ry logic Diam Preset1 Diam Preset0 Selection 0 0 Par 1164 Diam Preset 0 0 1 Par 1165 Diam Preset 1 1 0 Par 1166 Diam Preset 2 1 1 Par 1167 Diam Preset 3 Diam Inc Dec En This parameter It is used to improve system stability for winder unwinder applications If this parameter is enabled and if applied to a winder the calculated diameter can never decrease if applied to an unwinder the calculated diameter can never increase Diam init filter Initial filter on the diameter calculation Diam stdy delay The amount of time during which the value of Par 1206 Diam init filter is kept active after the value defined in Par 1155 Line Spd Thresh has been overcome Variable J Comp Torque compensation due to the wound material as a percentage of the drive rated current Constant J Comp Compensation of the fixed section motor reducer pin as a percentage of the drive rated current Materl Width Pct Width of the wound material as a percentage of the maximum width Static Friction Compensation for static friction as a percentage of the drive rated current Dynamic Friction Compensation for dynamic friction as a percentage of the drive rated current Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Mi
217. s and 9 Current Lim Neg are set to the same value If subsequently changed the value of Pars 8 Current Lim Pos and or 9 Current Lim Neg override the value of Par 7 Current Limit Current Lim Pos The drive current limit for the positive current direction expressed as a percentage of the value in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input Current Lim Neg The drive current limit for the negative current direction expressed as a percentage of the value in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps This parameter is not active for two quadrant drives Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog input Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 40 00 0 00 100 00 O 70 00 0 00 100 00 90 00 0 00 100 00 1 0 1 0 1 100 00 0 00 100 00 O o 300 0 1800 S 150 0 200 150 0 200 150 0 200 8 Related 4 469 469 916 917 918 179 Programming and Parameters 3 17 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 39 Torque Ref Default 0 First current reference value before any trim signals are Min Max 200 inco
218. s 3 43 Scale1 In Abs 492 Scale Blocks 3 39 Spd Match Compl 1203 Winder Functions 3 43 Scale1 In Max 488 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Match Dec 1197 Winder Functions 3 43 Scale1 In Min 489 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Match Gain 1200 Winder Functions 3 43 Scale1 In Off 490 Scale Blocks 3 39 Spd match torque 1216 Winder Functions 3 43 Scale1 Input 484 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Ref Out Pct 384 Speed Meters 3 11 Scale1 Mul 486 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Ref Zero En 124 Speed Regulator 3 26 Scale1 Out Off 491 Scale Blocks 3 39 Spd Reg Autotune 1027 Autotune 3 21 Scale1 Output 485 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Reg Ki 88 Speed Regulator 3 24 Scale2 Div 556 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Reg Ki Base 94 Speed Regulator 3 24 Scale2 In Abs 561 Scale Blocks 3 39 Spd Reg Ki Outpt 100 Speed Regulator 3 24 Scale2 In Max 557 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Reg Kp 87 Speed Regulator 3 24 Scale2 In Min 558 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Reg Kp Base 93 Speed Regulator 3 24 Scale2 In Off 559 Scale Blocks 3 39 Spd Reg Kp Outpt 99 Speed Regulator 3 24 Scale2 Input 553 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Reg Out Pct 236 Speed Regulator 3 11 Scale2 Mul 555 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Select 0 400 Diagnostics 3 48 Scale2 Out Off 560 Scale Blocks 3 39 Spd Select 1 401 Diagnostics 3 49 Scale2 Output 554 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Select 2 402 Diagnostics 3 49 Scale3 Div 1221 Scale Blocks 3 38 Spd Tune Inertia 1030 Autotune 3 21 Scale3 In Abs 1226 Scale Blocks 3 39 Spd Up Gain Pct 445 Speed Regulator 3 27 Scale3 In Max 1222
219. s parameter must be less than the value in Par 751 TrqTpr_LimO and greater than the values in Pars 753 TrqTpr Lim2 754 TrqTpr_Lim3 and 755 TrqTpr_Lim4 TrqTpr_Lim2 Second reduced current limit of the current speed curve The value defined in this parameter must be less than the value in Par 752 TrqTpr_Lim1 and greater than the values in Pars 754 TrqTpr_Lim3 and 755 TrqTpr_Lim4 TrqTpr_Lim3 Third reduced current limit of the current speed curve The value defined in this parameter must be less than the value in Par 753 TrqTpr_Lim2 and greater than the value in Par 755 TrqTpr_Lim4 TrqTpr_Lim4 Last reduced current limit of the current speed curve The value defined in this parameter must be less than the value in Par 754 TrqTpr_Lim3 The drive will operate at this current limit up to the value set in parameter 162 Max Feedback Spd TrqTpr_Spd Threshold speed at which torque reduction begins as determined by the current speed curve Filt Torq Cur First rate low pass filter for Par 1193 Torq Current Pct Values Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Disabled Disabled Enabled Par 162 Max Feedback Spd 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 0
220. sion Out 1 Digital Outputs 3 69 1378 Write Mask Cfg Security 3 60 1268 Inversion Out 2 Digital Outputs 3 69 1379 Port Mask Act Security 3 60 1269 Inversion Out 3 Digital Outputs 3 69 1380 Drive Alarm 1 Alarms 3 53 1270 Inversion Out 4 Digital Outputs 3 69 1381 TestPoint Sel Diagnostics 3 50 1271 Inversion Out 5 Digital Outputs 3 69 1382 TestPoint Data Diagnostics 3 50 1272 Inversion Out 6 Digital Outputs 3 69 1383 TaskLoad 32 ms Diagnostics 3 50 1273 Inversion Out 7 Digital Outputs 3 69 1384 TaskLoad 1 ms Diagnostics 3 50 1274 Inversion Out 8 Digital Outputs 3 69 1385 TaskLoad 2 ms Diagnostics 3 50 1275 Inversion Relay2 Digital Outputs 3 69 1386 TaskLoad 8 ms Diagnostics 3 50 No Parameter Name Group Page 1387 Inversion In 9 Digital Inputs 3 66 1388 Inversion In 10 Digital Inputs 3 66 1389 Inversion In 11 Digital Inputs 3 66 1390 Inversion In 12 Digital Inputs 3 66 1391 ContactorControl Digital Inputs 3 66 1392 Relay Out 1 Sel Digital Outputs 3 69 1393 Inversion Relay1 Digital Outputs 3 69 1402 Last Stop Source Diagnostics 3 51 1403 Start Inhibits Diagnostics 51 1404 Analog Int Value Analog Inputs 3 63 1405 Analog In2 Value Analog Inputs 3 63 1406 Analog In3 Value Analog Inputs 3 63 1407 Field Econ Delay Field Config 3 16 1408 Tachometer Speed Speed Meters 3 12 Programming and Parameters 3 81 3 82 Programmi
221. sks amp Owners 3 58 557 Scale In Max Scale Blocks 338 651 Encoder State Diagnostics 3 49 558 Scale2 In Min Scale Blocks 338 652 Encoder Err Chk Speed Feedback 3 19 559 Scale2 In Off Scale Blocks 3 39 660 Accel Time 1 Ramp Rates 3 29 560 Scale2 Out Off Scale Blocks 3 39 905 Decel Time Ramp Rates 329 561 Scale2 In Abs Scale Blocks 339 665 S Curve Accel 1 Ramp Rates 3 29 562 Anlg Tach Gain Speed Feedback 319 666 S Curve Decel 1 Ramp Rates 3 29 563 Anlg Tach Zero Speed Feedback 319 667 S Curve Accel 2 Ramp Rates 3 29 564 Dig In Status Digital Inputs 3 66 668 pute Decale Ramp Rates a 565 Dig In Term 1 Digital Inputs 3 66 695 dea ALS EN Contra 566 Dig In Term 2 Digital Inputs 3 66 696 Droop Percent Load Limits 3 30 567 Dig In Term 3 Digital Inputs 366 697 Droop Filter Load Limits 3 30 568 Dig In Term 4 Digital Inputs 3 66 698 Load Comp Load Limits 230 569 Dig In Term5 Digital Inputs 366 699 Enable Droop Load Limits 3 30 570 Dig In Term 6 Digital Inputs 3 66 100 Droop Limit rgan LIS se 571 Dig In Term 7 Digital Inputs 3 66 715 Torq Limit Type Load Limits 3 30 572 Digin Term 8 Digital Inputs 3 66 731 PID Steady Delay PID Control 3 35 573 Dig In Term 9 Digital Inputs 365 734 PI Init Intgl Gn PID Control 3 35 574 Dig In Term 10 Digital Inputs 3 66 750 TrqTpr_Enable Torque Attribute 3 18 575 Dig In Term 11 Digital Inputs 3 66 751 TrqTpr_Limo Torque Attribute 3 18 576 Dig In Term 12 Digital Inputs 3 66 752 TrqTpr_
222. speed reference in Par 118 Min Max 1 32767 O Speed Reg In at which the value of Par 394 At Speed changes Units RPM When the difference between the speed reference and the actual speed is greater than the value of this parameter Par 394 At Speed displays Not Equal 0 When the difference between the speed reference and the actual speed is less than the value of this parameter Par 394 At Speed displays Equal 1 105 At Speed Delay Default 100 394 Amount of time that must elapse before indication that the drive speed Min Max 0 65535 O reference is within the range specified in Par 104 At Speed Error Units ms occurs 106 Ref Zero Level Default 20 123 Speed below which speed references are equal to zero speed Switch Min Max 1 32767 125 used in the Speed Zero function Units RPM 126 107 Speed Zero Level Default 20 395 Speed below which the actual speed is considered equal to zero Min Max 1 32767 O When a Stop command is issued and actual speed goes below this Units RPM value drive output is disabled The value applies to both rotation directions for four quadrant drives Note Setting the value of this parameter too low could prevent the proper functioning of field economy Actual Speed Par 107 Speed Zero Level JE lie Actual Speed 0 tt Rev Par 395 At Zero Speed ease a Par 108 Speed Zero Delay 108 Speed Zero Delay Default 100 395 Amount of time that must
223. st Stop Source Default Read Only Displays the source that initiated the most recent stop sequence Options 0 PwrRemoved This parameter will be set to 0 Pwr Removed cleared during the 1 5 DPI Port 1 5 next start sequence 6 Reserved 7 Digital In 8 Fault 9 Not Enabled 10 Reserved 11 Jog 12 Selftune 13 Reserved 1403 Start Inhibits Displays the inputs currently preventing the drive from starting For each bit 1 Inhibit condition true and 0 Inhibit condition false 2 2 E a 5 o ja ja jo 315 2 5 555 8 ja a ala gt 8 is ie 8 2 e 3 em Q QOQ Q Q la a ce wn e V pu pu Default x x x 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 1 x 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 263 Clear Fault Que Default 0 Ready O Allows you to clear the fault queue Refer to Chapter 4 Options 0 Ready Troubleshooting on page 4 1 for information on clearing the fault 1 Clr Fit Que queue 1347 Fault Clear Default 0 Ready Allows you to reset drive faults and or clear the fault queue Options 0 Ready 1 Clear Faults 2 Clr Fit Que 1348 Fault Clr Mode Default 1 Enabled Enables Disables a fault reset clear faults attempt from any source Options 0 Disabled This does not apply to fault codes which are cleared indirectly via 1 Enabled other actions 1349 Status1 at Fault Captures and displays Par 381 Drive Status
224. t Owner 601 Masks amp Owners 3 58 UsrDefBitWrdA10 530 User Defined 3 55 Static F Zero 1287 Winder Functions 3 44 UsrDefBitWrdA11 531 User Defined 3 55 Static Friction 1174 Winder Functions 3 41 UsrDefBitWrdA12 532 User Defined 3 55 Status1 at Fault 1349 Faults 3 51 UsrDefBitWrdA13 533 User Defined 3 55 Status2 at Fault 1350 Faults 3 51 UsrDefBitWrdA14 534 User Defined 3 55 Stop Owner 600 Masks 8 Owners 3 58 UsrDefBitWrdA15 535 User Defined 3 55 achometer Speed 1408 Speed Meters 3 12 UsrDefBitWrdA2 522 User Defined 3 55 aper Enable 1176 Winder Functions 3 42 UsrDefBitWrdA3 523 User Defined 3 55 askLoad 1 ms 1384 Diagnostics 3 50 UsrDefBitWrdA4 524 User Defined 3 55 askLoad 2 ms 1385 Diagnostics 3 50 UsrDefBitWrdA5 525 User Defined 3 55 askLoad 32 ms 1383 Diagnostics 3 50 UsrDefBitWrdA6 526 User Defined 3 55 askLoad 8 ms 1386 Diagnostics 3 50 UsrDefBitWrdA7 527 User Defined 3 55 B Manual Ref 267 Discrete Speeds 23 UsrDefBitWrdA8 528 User Defined 55 ension Reduct 1179 Winder Functions 3 42 UsrDefBitWrdA9 529 User Defined 3 55 ension Ref 1180 Winder Functions 3 42 UsrDefBitWrdB 536 User Defined 3 56 ension Scale 1181 Winder Functions 3 42 UsrDefBitWrdBO 537 User Defined 3 56 estPoint Data 1382 Diagnostics 3 50 UsrDefBitWrdB1 538 User Defined 3 56 estPoint Sel 1381 Diagnostics 3 50 UsrDefBitWrdB10 547 User Defined 3 56 hreshold Delay 103 Speed Regulator 3 25 UsrDefBitWrdB11 548 User Defined 3 56 ime AccDec Min 1182 Winder
225. t Stop or when certain faults are configured for Quick Stop Spd 0 Trip Delay The amount of time that will elapse after the drive reaches zero speed before it is disabled Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 100 0 200 0 00 0 00 100 00 0 0 1000 ms 0 200 Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 O 1750 0 Par 45 Max Ref Speed RPM 0 Torq Lim Pos Neg 0 Torg Lim Pos Neg 1 Torq Lim Mtr Gen 10 0 65535 3 0 0 40000 ms S Related 3 41 45 698 354 365 File Group Stop Modes Restart Modes Adaptv Regulator 11262 1263 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Closing Speed Motor speed at which the brake is closed Used with External Brake Control Opening Delay Amount of time before the brake will open after the drive has been enabled Used with External Brake Control Ramp In Zero En Programming and Parameters Values Default 30 Min Max 0 200 Units RPM Default 0 Min Max 0 30000 Units ms Default 3 31 Related Enables Disables the setting of the ramp input to zero Use
226. t the factory Read Only no default Options Displays the programming selections available Bit Bit Lists the bit place holder and definition for each bit Numeric Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Read Only no default Min Max The range lowest and highest setting possible for the parameter Units Unit of measure and resolution as shown on the LCD HIM Important Some parameters will have two unit values e E g Analog inputs can be set for current or voltage as with Par 71 Anlg Inx Config send 5 00 RPM use 500 Important When sending values through DPI ports simply remove the decimal point to arrive at the correct value i e to Related Lists parameters if any that interact with the selected parameter The symbol 69 indicates that additional parameter information is available in Appendix C Application Notes on page C 1 How Parameters are Organized Programming and Parameters 3 3 The LCD HIM displays parameters in a File Group Parameter or Numbered List view order To switch display mode access the Main Menu press ALT then Sel View while the cursor is on the Parameter menu selection In addition using Par 211 Param Access Lvl you have the option to display the most commonly used parameters Basic Parameter view or all parameters Advanced Parameter View File Group Parameter Order This simplifies programming by grou
227. t the factory However if the Control board was supplied as a replacement part 15 must be manually set to the appropriate drive size Refer to DIP_ Switch and Jumper Settings on page 1 28 AC Line Voltage AC input voltage AC Line Freq AC input frequency Output Power Output power Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters Read Only 0 65535 Read Only 999 00 Vdc Read Only 0 00 65540 00 H m Read Only 10 11 Read Only 1 00 999 00 Read Only 0 Based on drive current rating A Read Only 0 960 Vac Read Only 0 00 70 00 Hz Read Only 0 00 9999 99 kW 3 13 Related 3 14 File MOTOR CONTROL Group Motor Data Field Config Programming and Parameters No 45 162 175 280 Motor Control File Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Max Ref Speed Maximum reference speed as determined by the application If Field Weakening is not required this value will be equal to the Motor Nameplate Base Speed RPM The value of this parameter is used to scale all of the other speed reference rela
228. t to 1 Enabled and the value in Par 107 Speed Zero Level is reached the minimum field current set via Par 468 Min Fld Curr Pct is produced field economy e Disabled Disables the field economy function e Enabled Enables the field economy function Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Programming and Parameters 100 0 100 100 Par 468 Min Fld Curr Pct 100 O 30 0 Par 467 Max Fld Curr Pct O o Base Speed Base Speed Field Weaken External Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 O Enabled Disabled Enabled 3 15 Related 468 467 499 916 917 918 473 395 468 3 16 File MOTOR CONTROL Group Field Config Programming and Parameters Oo Oo Oo j OBS og co co 920 1407 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Fld Const 40 Pct Current value at 40 of the field current Fld Const 70 Pct Current value at 70 of the field current Fld Const 90 Pct Current value at 90 of the field current Set Fld Curve When set to 0 this parameter controls the motor field current to field reference curve
229. ted parameters Max Feedback Spd Maximum feedback speed as determined by the application If Field Weakening is not used the value of this parameter will be equal to the Motor Nameplate base speed This value must be at least 10 lower than the Motor nameplate maximum safe speed in order to allow an Overspeed fault to occur The value in this parameter is also used to convert tachometer and armature feedback values to rpm When armature voltage feedback is used the value of Par 175 Rated Motor Volt is considered equivalent to Par 162 Max Feedback Spd Therefore this parameter should be set appropriately Rated Motor Volt Maximum armature voltage of the drive Typically this value is set to the Motor Nameplate Armature voltage When Par 469 Field Mode Sel is set to 1 Field Weaken the value in this parameter equals the voltage that begins the weakening phase of the field Note This parameter affects the threshold of an overvoltage condition as indicated by an Arm Overvoltage fault F5 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Rated motor nameplate armature current The settings for the current limit and the overload function are based on this current value Drive Type Sel This parameter is only applicable to non regenerative 2 quadrant drives It allows non regenerative drives to use an external 4 quadrant controller e On Ramp Speed Torque current references and Speed measurement have the same behavior
230. tics 3 49 919 Set Fld Curve Field Config 3 16 1190 Fast Stop Status Diagnostics 3 49 920 Reset Fld Curve Field Config 3 16 1191 InertiaCompAct Speed Regulator 3 27 921 Out Volt Level Field Config 3 16 1192 InertiaCompVar Speed Regulator 3 27 923 Act Spd Filter Speed Feedback 3 20 1193 Torq Current Pct Winder Functions 3 42 924 Actual Speed Speed Meters 3 12 1194 Act Ten Ref Pct Winder Functions 3 42 926 Filt Torq Cur Torque Attribute 3 18 1195 Speed Match Winder Functions 3 42 928 Filt TorqCur Pct Current Meters 3 12 1196 Spd Match Acc Winder Functions 3 43 1012 Inertia C Filter Autotune 3 20 1197 Spd Match Dec Winder Functions 3 43 1013 Torque Const Autotune 3 20 1198 Offs Accel Time Winder Functions 3 43 1014 Inertia Autotune 3 20 1199 W Offset Winder Functions 3 43 1015 Friction Autotune 3 20 1200 Spd Match Gain Winder Functions 3 43 1016 SpdFuncSelect Speed Regulator 3 27 1201 Winder Side Winder Functions 3 43 1017 Speed Ratio Speed References 3 24 1202 W Gain Winder Functions 3 43 1018 Speed Draw Out Speed Meters 3 12 1203 Spd Match Compl Winder Functions 3 43 1019 Spd Draw Out Pct Speed Meters 3 12 1204 Line Spd Source Winder Functions 3 43 3 80 Programming and Parameters
231. tions If the bit is 0 the feature is off or the condition is false If the bit is 1 the feature is on or the condition is true e Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numerical value and unit i e 0 1 Volts The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual 1 You must use DriveExplorer v5 02 or higher or DriveTools SP v4 01 or higher with a PowerFlex DC drive specific software patch The patch can be downloaded from http www ab com support abdrives webupdate 3 2 Group File SPEED COMMAND COMMUNICATIONS Programming and Parameters No 388 Speed Regulator 445 591 Masks amp Owners Parameter Name amp Description Flying Start En Enables Disables the ability of the drive to connect to a spinning motor at actual RPM when a start command is issued e Enabled When the drive is turned on the speed of the motor is measured and the ramp output is set accordingly The drive then runs at the set reference value e Disabled When the drive is turned on the ramp starts from zero Main uses e To connect to a motor that is already spinning due to its load e g in the case of pumps the flowing medium e Re connection to a spinning motor after a fault or alarm Note If the Flying Start function is disabled ensure that the motor is not spinning when the drive is turned on or harsh motor deceleration in
232. tive e Active The value of the ramp output at the time of activation is retained irrespective of any possible reference value changes at the ramp input e Not Active The ramp output value follows the ramp input value according to the Ramp Reference Block commands Accel Time 1 Sets the rate of acceleration for Ramp 1 Acceleration rate for Ramp 1 Par 2 Maximum Speed Par 660 Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 Sets the rate of deceleration for Ramp 1 Deceleration rate for Ramp 1 Par 2 Maximum Speed Par 662 Decel Time 1 S Curve Accel 1 Defines the acceleration curve for S shaped ramp 1 S Curve Decel 1 Defines the deceleration curve for S shaped ramp 1 S Curve Accel 2 Defines the acceleration curve for S shaped ramp 2 S Curve Decel 2 Defines the deceleration curve for S shaped ramp 2 Acc Dec Filter Internal acceleration deceleration calculation filter for the Torque Winder line speed reference Values Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters 10 0 65535 Ss 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Not Active 0 Active 1
233. to the Catalog Number Explanation on page Preface 4 for a list of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame sizes The following manuals are recommended for general drive information Title Publication Available Online at Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and DRIVES TDO001 Drive System Equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation SGI 1 1 and Maintenance of Solid State Control A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic 100 2 10 Diagrams Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000 4 5 2 www rockwellautomation com literature For Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Title Online at Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support www ab com support abdrives Manual Conventions General Precautions Overview p 3 e To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used Parameter Names will appear in brackets For example Armature Voltage Display Text will appear in quotes For example Enabled e The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action Word Meaning Can Possible able to do something Cannot Not possible not able to do something May Permitted allowed Must Unavoidable you must do this Shall Required and necessary Should Recommended Should Not Not recommended A gt ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Ele
234. tual direction of the motor If the sign and value of Par 1408 Tachometer Speed and the motor direction do not correspond remove power from the drive and reverse the tachometer connections at the drive Continue with Step 10 Configure the Speed Feedback Parameters on page 2 12 For Encoder feedback Assert a Jog command and verify that the sign and value of Par 420 Encoder Speed correspond with the actual direction of the motor If the sign and value of Par 420 Encoder Speed and the motor direction do not correspond remove power from the drive and reverse the encoder connections at the drive Reverse the polarity of only one channel e g B and B NOT Refer to Table 1 V on page 1 36 for digital encoder terminal block designations Continue with Step 10 Configure the Speed Feedback Parameters on page 2 12 2 12 Drive Start Up 10 Configure the Speed Feedback Parameters 1 2 3 Access the Speed Feedback group and configure the following parameters l Par 414 Fdbk Device Type Select the source for motor velocity feedback 1 Encoder 2 DC Tach or 3 Armature default If operating the drive in field weakening mode Par 414 Fdbk Device Type must be set to 1 Encoder or 2 DC Tach 1 Par 457 Spd Fdbk Control If you are using an encoder or tachometer set this parameter to 1 Enabled to activate speed feedback control Li Ifthe speed feedback source is an analog tac
235. ult 18 Speed Sel 2 Digital In7 Sel Default 19 Speed Sel 3 Digital In8 Sel Default 31 Contactor Digital In9 Sel Default 0 NotUsed 142 Digital In10 Sel Default 0 Not Used 143 Digital In11 Sel Default 0 NotUsed 144 Digital In12 Sel Default 0 NotUsed Selects the function driven by the digital input Refer to Option Definitions for Digital Inx Sel on page 3 65 These parameters are used to configure the digital inputs on the I O Expansion circuit board Options 5 S 0 Not Used 16 Auto Manual 32 MOP Reset 48 Pl Cent vs0 1 Enable 17 Speed Sel 1 33 TorqueReduce 49 PI Cent vs1 5 2 Stop CP 18 Speed Sel 2 34 Field Reg En 50 Diam Calc 3 Star 19 Speed Sel 3 35 Fld Weak En 51 Diam Reset E 4 Fwd Reverse 20 PI Enable 36 Freeze Ramp 52 DiamCalc Dis 5 Rune 21 Pl Hold 37 UsrDefinedA0 53 Torq Wind En RunForward 22 Pl Reset 38 UsrDefinedA1 54 Speed Match 7 Run Reverse 23 PI Invert 39 UsrDefinedA2 55 Diam I D En Run Level 24 Local 40 UsrDefinedA3 56 Wind Unwind RunFwdLevel 25 Acc2 amp Dec2 41 UsrDefinedA4 57 Diam Preset0 10
236. ult Clr Owner 606 Direction Mask 594 Stop Owner 600 MOP Owner 607 Reference Mask 595 Start Owner 601 Local Owner 608 Accel Mask 596 Jog Owner 602 Decel Owner 609 Fault Clr Mask 597 Direction Owner 603 Datalinks Data In A1 610 Data In D1 616 Data Out C1 622 Data In A2 611 Data In D2 617 Data Out C1 623 Data In B1 612 Data Out A1 618 Data Out D1 624 Data In B2 613 Data Out A2 619 Data Out D2 625 Data In C1 614 Data Out B1 620 Data In Val Sel 1319 Data In C2 615 Data Out B2 621 Data In SelData 1320 Security Logic Mask 591 Write Mask Act 1377 Port Mask Act 1379 Logic Mask Act 1376 Write Mask Cfg 1378 3 10 Programming and Parameters File Input Output Group Parameters Analog Inputs Anlg In1 Sel 70 Anlg2 Tune Scale 78 Anlg In2 Target 296 Anlg Int Config 71 Anlg In2 Offset 79 Anlg In3 Target 297 Anlg Ini Scale 72 Anlg In2 Tune 260 Anlg Int Cmp 1042 Anlgi Tune Scale 73 Anlg In3 Sel 80 Anlg Int Cmp Err 1043 Anlg Int Offset 74 Anlg In3 Config 81 Anlg In1 Cmp Dly 1044 Anlg In1 Tune 259 Anlg In3 Scale 82 Anlg Int Cmp Eq 1045 Anlg In1 Filter 792 Anlg3 Tune Scale 83 Analog In1 Value 1404 Anlg In2 Sel 75 Anlg In3 Offset 84 Analog In2 Value 1405 Anlg In2 Config 76 Anlg In3 Tune 261 Analog In3 Value 1406 Anlg In2 Scale 77 Anlg In1 Target 295 Analog Outputs Anlg Out1 Sel 66 Anlg Out4 Sel 69 Analog Out3 Scale 64 Anlg Out2 Sel 67 Analog Out1
237. utputs 3 63 143 Digital In11 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 67 Anlg Out2 Sel Analog Outputs 3 63 144 Digital In12 Sel Digital Inputs 3 64 68 Anlg Out3 Sel Analog Outputs 3 63 145 Digital Out1 Sel Digital Outputs 3 67 69 Anlg Out4 Sel Analog Outputs 3 63 146 Digital Out2 Sel Digital Outputs 3 67 70 Anlg Ini Sel Analog Inputs 3 61 147 Digital Outs Sel Digital Outputs 3 67 71 Anlg Int Config Analog Inputs 3 61 148 Digital Out4 Se Digital Outputs 3 67 72 Anlg Int Scale Analog Inputs 3 61 149 Digital Out5 Se Digital Outputs 3 67 73 Anlg1 Tune Scale Analog Inputs 3 61 150 Digital Out6 Sel Digital Outputs 3 67 74 Anlg In1 Offset Analog Inputs 3 62 151 Digital Out7 Sel Digital Outputs 3 67 75 Anlg In2 Sel Analog Inputs 3 61 152 Digital Out8 Sel Digital Outputs 3 67 76 Anlg In2 Config Analog Inputs 3 61 154 Preset Speed 1 Discrete Speeds 3 23 77 Anlg In2 Scale Analog Inputs 3 61 155 Preset Speed 2 Discrete Speeds 3 23 78 Anlg2 Tune Scale Analog Inputs 3 61 156 Preset Speed 3 Discrete Speeds 3 23 79 Anlg In2 Offset Analog Inputs 3 62 157 Preset Speed 4 Discrete Speeds 3 23 80 Anlg In3 Sel Analog Inputs 3 61 158 Preset Speed 5 Discrete Speeds 3 23 Programming and Parameters 3 77
238. vices connected to the hooks must be long enough to make the angle between the chain or cable and a vertical line extending up from the flange center less than 45 degrees as illustrated below Figure 1 5 Lifting Angle Angle Must Be Less Than 45 Degrees Lifting flange El mr C7 o o a 1 4 Lift the drive into place on to the bolt installed in the panel 5 Install the remaining five bolts into the panel Tighten all bolts to a torque of 22 6 N m 200 Ib in Removing the Drive Covers Installation and Wiring 1 7 The lower protective cover must be removed in order to access the drive s power and I O terminals The upper cover only needs to be removed to install an optional communication adapter and service the drive Refer to Installing a Communication Adapter on page E 1 for information Frame A Drives You must remove both the lower protective cover and the power terminal cover on frame A drives to access the power terminals Remove the Power Terminal Cover Remove the two screws as shown below and slide the cover down and off the chassis Figure 1 6 Frame A Power Terminal Cover Removal IVVVUUVVUBVUUEVUVUUAVN VUVBLRVVULVOLOLYGVLOY A NN 1 8 Installation and Wiring Remove the Lower Protective Cover Remove the two screws as shown below and while gently lifting along the
239. ws that secure the power terminal cover to the drive chassis and remove the terminal cover in order to connect the armature power wiring Front View Note Front view of drive shown with bottom protective and power terminal covers removed PE U C V D W ATTENTION Do not operate the drive with the power A terminal cover removed Operating the drive with the power terminal cover removed may result in a hazardous condition that could cause personal injury and or equipment damage Installation and Wiring 1 17 Figure 1 15 Frame B Armature Converter Terminal Block Location Figure 1 16 Frame C Armature Converter Terminal Block Location Front View DANGER 1 la ADANGER a 1 g ar DANGER 3 Di a Bottom View 1 18 Installation and Wiring Table 1 F Armature Terminal and Ground PE Wire Sizes Drive Current Rating Tightening 2 1 odd E Code Wire Size Terminal Bolt Torque ix 230V 460V Terminals AWG kcmils Size mm N m Ibs in A 7P0 4P1 9P0 6P0 UVWC 012 010 D PE 110 5 6 53 020 014 019 029 027 U V W C D PE 8 5 6 53 038 035 UVWC 055 045 D PE 1 14 5 6 53 052 073 073 U V W C 4 0 D Terminal Block 12 106 PE 2 093 086 U V W C 1 0 D Terminal Block 12 1106 PE 2 110 U V W C 4 0 D Terminal Block 12 1106 PE 2 100 U V W 3 0
240. x Par 7 Current Limit Note Par 8 Current Lim Pos the drive current limit for the positive direction and Par 9 Current Lim Neg the drive current limit for the negative direction are set to 150 by default If necessary you can change the value of these parameters to suit your application 3 Access the Speed Feedback group and verify that Par 414 Fdbk Device Type is set to 3 Armature default Drive Start Up 2 9 4 Press the Esc key until you return to the File menu and access Par 452 CurrReg Autotune in the Autotune group in the Motor Control file and select 1 On and press Enter 5 Press the Start button on the HIM This will start the current regulator auto tuning test which could take several minutes At the end of the test the drive will automatically be stopped and Par 452 CurrReg Autotune will be set to 0 Off If the value of Par 587 I Reg Error is greater than 40 refer to Manually Adjusting the Current Regulator Tune Settings on page C 22 for more information If a drive fault occurs during the tuning procedure refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4 4 for a list of fault descriptions and actions 9 Verify Motor Rotation and Run Feedback Polarity Checks The jog function on the HIM or terminal block will be used to check motor direction and encoder operation If the STS LED is not flashing green at this point refer to Figure 2 1 on page 2 4 for more
241. y 32766 RPM Read Only 100 00 Read Only 32766 RPM Read Only 100 00 Read Only 100 00 Read Only 32766 RPM Read Only 100 00 Read Only 32766 RPM Read Only 100 00 Read Only 32766 RPM Read Only 8192 RPM 3 11 Related 45 923 414 3 12 File MONITOR Group Speed Meters Current Meters Programming and Parameters 924 1018 1019 1408 10 11 199 200 234 236 351 500 928 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Actual Speed Filtered value of Par 122 Spd Feedback Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Speed Draw Out Speed draw output value Note This parameter can be assigned to an analog output Spd Draw Out Pct Speed value as a percentage of Par 45 Max Ref Speed Tachometer Speed Actual speed measured by the DC analog tachometer Cur Lim Pos Out Displays the value of the current limit for the positive torque direction expressed as a percentage of the value in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Cur Lim Neg Out Displays the value of the current limit for the negative torque direction expressed as a percentage of the value in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Current Reg In Total current reference value expressed as a percentage of the value in Par 179 Nom Mtr Arm Amps Note This parameter can be
242. y 731 PID Setpoint Sel 762 PID Source Gain 787 PI Init Intg Gn 734 PID Feedback 763 PID Accel Time 1046 PID Clamp 757 PID Output Sign 772 PID Decel Time 1047 Feed Fwd PID 758 PID Output Scale 773 PID Error Gain 1254 PID Error 759 PID Output 774 Scale Blocks Scale1 Input 484 Scale3 Input 1218 Scale5 Input 1236 Scale1 Output 485 Scale3 Output 1219 Scale5 Output 1237 Scale1 Mul 486 Scale3 Mul 1220 Scale5 Mul 1238 Scale1 Div 487 Scale3 Div 1221 Scale5 Div 1239 Scale1 In Max 488 Scale3 In Max 1222 Scale5 In Max 1240 Scale1 In Min 489 Scale3 In Min 1223 Scale5 In Min 1241 Scale1 In Off 490 Scale In Off 1224 Scale5 In Off 1242 Scale1 Out Off 491 Scale3 Out Off 1225 Scale5 Out Off 1243 Scale1 In Abs 492 Scale3 In Abs 1226 Scale5 In Abs 1244 Scale2 Input 553 Scale4 Input 1227 Scale6 Input 1245 Scale2 Output 554 Scale4 Output 1228 Scale6 Output 1246 Scale2 Mul 555 Scale4 Mul 1229 Scale6 Mul 1247 Scale2 Div 556 Scale4 Div 1230 Scale6 Div 1248 Scale2 In Max 557 Scale4 In Max 1231 Scale6 In Max 1249 Scale2 In Min 558 Scale4 In Min 1232 Scale6 In Min 1250 Scale2 In Off 559 Scale4 In Off 1233 Scale6 In Off 1251 Scale2 Out Off 560 Scale4 Out Off 1234 Scale6 Out Off 1252 Scale2 In Abs 561 Scale4 In Abs 1235 Scale6 In Abs 1253 Diameter Calc Diameter Calc 794 Line Spd Thresh 1155 Diam Preset 0 1164 DncrPosSpa 795 Line Spd Gain 11

PowerFlex DC User Manual Part 1 - Mid

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents